Nortel Networks Telephone NN43001 504 User Manual

Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation  
and Commissioning  
NN43001-504  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Revision history  
June 2007  
Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to reflect a change in the  
revision history.  
May 2007  
Standard 01.01. This document is issued to support Nortel Communication  
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains information previously  
contained in the following legacy document, now retired: WLAN IP  
Telephony Installation and Configuration (553-3001-304).  
August 2005  
Standard 4.00. This document is up-issued to support Nortel  
Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5.  
September 2004  
Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Nortel Networks  
Communication Server 1000 Release 4.0.  
June 2004  
Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued to reflect changes in technical  
content.  
May 2004  
Standard 1.00. This document is issued to support the Nortel Networks  
WLAN system, including the Nortel Networks WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245, Nortel Networks WLAN Application Gateway 2246, Nortel Networks  
WLAN Handset 2210, and Nortel Networks WLAN Handset 2211.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Revision history  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Contents  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Contents  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 11  
Procedures  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
New in this release  
The following sections detail what is new in WLAN IP Telephony Installation  
and Commissioning (NN43001-504) for CS 1000, Release 5.0.  
Feature description  
Support is provided for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140 through the addition  
of the Nortel WLAN Handset 6100 Series Administration Tool Software.  
For more information about this tool for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140,  
including personal computer requirements, how to install the USB driver,  
and how to install and use the software, see WLAN Handsets Fundamentals  
(NN43001-505).  
Other changes  
This document is renamed and renumbered from WLAN IP Telephony:  
Installation and Configuration (553-3001-304) to WLAN IP Telephony  
Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-504). WLAN Handset  
configuration information is moved to WLAN Handsets Fundamentals  
(NN43001-505).  
For information about changes that are not feature-related, see the following  
sections:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
14 New in this release  
Multicast  
The WLAN Handset 6140 uses IP multicast addresses.  
Zones for wireless handsets  
The WLAN Handset 6120/6140 is added to the designated wireless handset  
types.  
Open and use the Admin menu on the handset  
The procedures for opening and using the Admin menu on the WLAN  
Handset 6120/6140 and how to make an alphanumeric string entry are  
added.  
Admin menu options for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
A full description of all the options available from the Admin menu is given  
for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140.  
Download the software  
The procedure for downloading the software for the WLAN Handset  
6120/6140 is described.  
Feature programming for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
A full description of the feature programming available for the WLAN  
Handset 6120/6140 is provided. This section includes soft key assignment,  
feature assignment, programming memory keys, accessing features, and  
programming the keys on the WLAN Handset 6120/6140.  
Test the wireless handsets  
The procedure for testing the WLAN IP 6120 handset is provided.  
Run Site Survey for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
Site Survey is used to evaluate the facility coverage before certifying that  
an installation is complete.  
Diagnostics mode  
Diagnostics screen 2 shows the GatewayType for all handsets.  
Push-to-talk  
With the Push-to-talk (PTT) feature, the WLAN Handset 6120/6140 can  
operate in a PTT group-broadcast mode like a two-way radio, in addition  
to the standard telephone operation. This section describes how to initiate  
and receive a PTT call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Other changes 15  
Wireless handset status messages  
The new messages are:  
Error!  
Server Unavailable. Restarting...  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16 New in this release  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
How to get help  
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.  
Getting help from the Nortel Web site  
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel  
Technical Support Web site:  
This site provides access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to  
address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:  
download software, documentation, and product bulletins  
search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base  
for answers to technical issues  
arrange for automatic notification of new software and documentation  
for Nortel equipment  
open and manage technical support cases  
Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center  
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support  
Web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help  
over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.  
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).  
Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the telephone  
number for your region:  
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code  
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an  
Express Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in  
your Nortel product or service. To locate the current ERC for your product  
or service, go to:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
18 How to get help  
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller  
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor  
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor  
or reseller.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
19  
Overview  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Subject  
This document describes the planning, installation, configuration,  
maintenance, and troubleshooting for the Nortel WLAN system, including  
the following elements:  
Nortel WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Nortel WLAN Application Gateway 2246 (optional)  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2210  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
20 Overview  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2211  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2212  
Nortel WLAN Handset 6120  
Nortel WLAN Handset 6140  
Note about legacy products and releases  
This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features  
that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 5.0  
software. For more information about legacy products and releases, click  
the Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the  
Nortel home page:  
Applicable systems  
This document applies to the following systems:  
Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)  
Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)  
Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)  
Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)  
Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades can be required on  
the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.  
System migration  
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release  
5.0 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become  
(page 20) lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to  
a CS 1000M system.  
Table 1  
Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems  
This Meridian 1 system  
Meridian 1 PBX 51C  
Meridian 1 PBX 61C  
Meridian 1 PBX 81C  
Maps to this CS 1000M system  
CS 1000M Half Group  
CS 1000M Single Group  
CS 1000M Multi Group  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Resources 21  
Conventions  
In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as  
system:  
Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M)  
Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)  
The following systems are referred to generically as large systems:  
Communication Server 1000M Half Group (CS 1000M HG)  
Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)  
Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)  
Resources  
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.  
NTPs  
The following NTPs are referenced in this document:  
WLAN Handset 2210 User Guide (NN10300-077)  
WLAN Handset 2211 User Guide (NN10300-078)  
WLAN Handset 2212 User Guide (NN10300-071)  
WLAN Handset 6120 User Guide (NN43150-100)  
Features and Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106)  
Main Office Configuration Guide for Survivable Remote Gateway 50  
(NN43001-307)  
Branch Office Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-314)  
IP Line Fundamentals (NN43001-500)  
WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505)  
Online  
To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation  
link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page:  
CD-ROM  
To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer  
representative.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
22 Overview  
Declaration of conformity  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 have been found to comply with the following:  
FCC Part 15 Class A - Radiate and Conducted Emissions requirements  
CISPR 22 Class A - Radiate and Conducted Emissions requirements  
ICES 003 Class A - Radiate and Conducted Emissions requirements  
EN 55022 Class A - Radiated and Conducted Emissions requirements  
EN 55024 Immunity Requirements  
EN 61000-3-2 Harmonic Current Emissions  
EN 61000-3-3 Flicker Emissions  
WARNING  
Changes or modifications to this equipment not approved by  
Nortel can cause this equipment to not comply with part 15 of the  
FCC rules and void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
WARNING  
This equipment contains no user-serviceable parts inside. Refer  
servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Shielded cable  
Nortel recommends the use of shielded cable for all external signal  
connections in order to maintain FCC Part 15 emissions requirements.  
Wireless telephone network description  
The Nortel WLAN wireless telephone network consists of the following  
components:  
Call Server  
DHCP server  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wireless telephone network description 23  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server  
Firewall  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212, and Nortel WLAN Handset  
6120/6140  
Nortel WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Nortel WLAN Application Gateway 2246 (optional)  
Access Point (AP)—one or more as required by the site  
a typical wireless telephone network configuration. The three different lines  
indicate the following:  
Red—signalling  
Blue dashed—wireless to wireless audio  
Blue solid—wireless to wired audio  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 Overview  
Figure 1  
Typical wireless telephone network configuration  
Call Server  
The Call Server can be the Call Server of any Nortel Communication Server  
(CS) 1000 system running CS 1000 Release 5.0 software.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and WLAN Handset 6120/6140 25  
DHCP Server  
The existing DHCP Server can be on either side of the firewall, according  
to the site administrator’s preference. The DHCP server is optional if the  
wireless handsets and WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 are statically  
configured.  
DHCP options  
If you use a DHCP Server, configure the following options:  
DHCP Option 3—the Default Gateway  
DHCP Option 7—the Syslog Server  
DHCP Option 42—the Time Server  
DHCP Option 60—the Class Identifier  
DHCP Option 66—the IP address of the TFTP Server  
DHCP Option 151—the IP address of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245  
DHCP Option 152—the IP address for the optional WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246  
For more information, see "DHCP server options" (page 184).  
TFTP Server  
A TFTP Server is required in an IP Telephony system to distribute software  
to the wireless handsets and WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. It can  
reside on a different subnet than the Call Server and APs. The TFTP Server  
can be located on either side of the firewall.  
Firewall  
The firewall is an optional element that is often used to separate the wireless  
and wired domains.  
WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
The WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and WLAN Handset 6120/6140 uses  
Voice over IP (VoIP) technology on IEEE 802.11-compliant Wireless Local  
Area Networks (WLANs). Access points (AP) use radio frequencies to  
transmit signals to and from the wireless handsets.  
ATTENTION  
In this document, handsets means the WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and  
WLAN Handset 6120/6140. Where the feature refers only to a specific handset,  
the full handset name is used.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
26 Overview  
Employees carry wireless handsets to make and receive calls as they move  
throughout the building. The handsets are used only on the premises; they  
are not cellular phones. The handsets communicate with the CS 1000 and  
with the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. Just like wired telephones, the  
wireless handsets receive calls directly, receive transferred calls, transfer  
calls to other extensions, and make outside and long-distance calls (subject  
to corporate restrictions).  
The handsets interoperate with other IP Line and IP Trunk features and  
devices, such as IP Peer, and the IP Phone 20xx and IP Softphone 2050  
series of IP Phones, with the exception of some media-related constraints  
described in "Codecs" (page 79).  
The frequencies that are allocated are governed by IEEE guidelines for  
WLANs and are part of the free spectrum. The WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
uses a, b, and g frequencies, and the WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212  
uses the b frequency.  
The handsets work only in a Nortel Succession 3.0 (and later) environment  
coordinated with a Communication Server (CS) 1000 or Business  
Communications Server (BCM). These handsets communicate with the  
Nortel call server through the Unified Network IP Stimulus (UNIStim)  
protocol. The media path of the voice call goes from the handset directly to  
the destination device (through the WLAN Telephony Manager 2245). In  
addition, the handset encapsulates all traffic in the SpectraLink Voice Priority  
(SVP) protocol. The WLAN Telephony Manager 2245 deencapsulates the  
VoIP traffic from SVP and passes it onto the network—it does not translate  
between UNIStim and SVP. Therefore, the Telephony Manager 2245 is in  
the path of all communication to and from the handset. Likewise, signaling  
goes from the handset to the Telephony Manager 2245 to the call server.  
The WLAN Handset 2211 and the WLAN Handset 6140 are the most  
durable and they are the only handsets that support Push-to-talk (PTT).  
For more information about the handsets, see the following publications:  
WLAN Handset 2210 User Guide (NN10300-077)  
WLAN Handset 2211 User Guide (NN10300-078)  
WLAN Handset 2212 User Guide (NN10300-071)  
WLAN Handset 6120 User Guide (NN43150-100)  
WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505)  
Components  
The WLAN Handset Series 2200 offers the following components for local  
configuration:  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2200 Series Configuration Cradle  
Software—software only  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and WLAN Handset 6120/6140 27  
Nortel WLAN Handset 2200 Series Configuration Cradle—required  
hardware (serial cable included)  
The WLAN Handset 6100 Series offers the following components for local  
configuration:  
Nortel WLAN Handset 6100 Series Administration Tool  
Software—software only  
Nortel WLAN Handset 6100 Series Dual Slot Handset Charger—required  
hardware (USB cable not included)  
USB Cable for the Nortel WLAN Handset 6100 Series Dual Slot Handset  
Charger  
ATTENTION  
For the purposes of this document  
Configuration Cradle refers to the Nortel WLAN Handset 2200 Series  
Configuration Cradle.  
Handset Administration Tool refers to the Nortel WLAN Handset 6100  
Series Administration Tool Software.  
Dual Slot Handset Charger or Handset Charger refers to the Nortel  
WLAN Handset 6100 Series Dual Slot Handset Charger.  
Language  
The handset menus and screens that originate from the Call Server  
are displayed in the languages supported on the Call Server. The  
administration and configuration menus, and all other local handset prompts  
are English-only.  
Licenses  
The handset appears to the Call Server as a standard IP Phone 2004.  
Therefore, each wireless handset requires one IP User License and is  
subject to the same feature packaging requirements as the existing IP  
Phone 2004.  
Wi-Fi Multimedia  
The handsets support basic Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) to improve Quality  
of Service (QoS), as defined in the 802.11e specification. WMM provides  
prioritized QoS capability when concurrent applications, each with unique  
latency requirements, are competing for network resources.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
28 Overview  
When WMM is used, all voice traffic originating from the wireless handset is  
assigned the WMM Voice Access Category, making it the highest priority  
application. If the wireless network supports WMM, the handsets enable  
WMM support automatically; otherwise, SpectraLink Voice Prioritization  
(SVP) is used.  
Wired Equivalent Privacy  
The handsets support Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) as defined by the  
802.11a, b, and g specification. Nortel offers the product with both 40-bit  
and 128-bit encryption. WEP increases the security of the wireless LAN to a  
level similar to a wired Ethernet LAN.  
Wi-Fi Protected Access  
The handsets support Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) using preshared key  
(PSK), as defined by the 802.11i specification. WPA increases the security  
of the wireless LAN, using key encryption, key rotation, authentication and  
message integrity checking.  
Wi-Fi Protected Access2  
The handsets support Wi-Fi Protected Access2 (WPA2) using preshared  
key (PSK) and Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), as defined by the  
802.11i specification. WPA2 increases the security of the wireless LAN,  
using key encryption, key rotation, data encryption, authentication, and  
message integrity checking.  
Virtual Private Network  
The WLAN Handset 2212 supports Virtual Private Network (VPN) security.  
VPN security provides a secure tunnel for the transfer of unencrypted  
information. A two-phase approach is used to negotiate the tunnel, with  
Phase 1 protecting Phase 2. Phase 1 uses preshared keys, Diffie-Hellman  
group, hashing, and encryption. Phase 2 uses hashing and encryption.  
Both phases have limited, configurable lifetimes.  
Push-to-talk feature  
With the Push-to-talk (PTT) feature, the WLAN Handset 2211 and the  
WLAN Handset 6140 can operate in a PTT group-broadcast mode like a  
two-way radio, in addition to the standard telephone operation.  
For more information, see WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
Text-messaging feature  
All WLAN handsets support text messaging applications through the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246. The application server communicates to the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 through a proprietary Open Application  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 29  
Interface (OAI) messaging protocol. The WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 forwards the messages to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager, which  
encapsulates the message for delivery to the handset.  
If text-messaging functions are programmed, the handset can receive text  
messages. While you access text messages, the handset is in messaging  
mode. Incoming calls ring with the second call-ringing sound.  
Loud noise environments  
The handsets are designed to provide optimal voice quality. However, when  
used in extremely loud noise environments, (for example, close to working  
heavy machinery), degradation in call quality can be experienced due to  
echo. Avoid using the handsets in loud noise environments.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is a device that manages IP  
telephony network traffic on the WLAN system. It is required to utilize the  
11Mbs maximum transmission speed available in the handsets. The WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 acts as a proxy for the wireless handsets. It  
provides a number of services including a QoS mechanism, AP bandwidth  
management, and efficient RF link utilization.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 works with the APs to provide  
Quality of Service (QoS) on the WLAN. All voice packets are encapsulated  
by the wireless handsets. The encapsulated voice packets to and from the  
wireless handsets are handled by the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
and routed to and from a Call Server.  
SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) is the QoS mechanism implemented on  
the wireless handsets and APs to enhance voice quality over the wireless  
network. SVP gives preference to voice packets over data packets on  
the wireless medium, increasing the probability that all voice packets are  
transmitted and with minimum delay. SVP is fully compliant with the IEEE  
802.11 and 802.11a, b, and g standards.  
Each subnet, where the wireless handsets operate, requires at least one  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. One standalone unit can process up to  
80 simultaneous calls depending on the model, as listed in Table 2 "WLAN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
30 Overview  
greater capacity is required, multiple units can be used in a master-slave  
arrangement.  
Table 2  
WLAN Telephony Manager 2245 model numbers and capacities  
Model number  
Maximum  
number users  
NTTQ60BA  
NTTQ60CA  
NTTQ60AA  
10 simultaneous users  
20 simultaneous users  
80 simultaneous users (standard)  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is an optional device that enables  
third-party applications to communicate directly with up to 10 000 wireless  
handsets. The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is connected to the LAN  
Ethernet switch through an RJ-45CAT5 cable.  
For more information about the WLAN Application Gateway 2246, see  
A WLAN Application Gateway 2246 supports 64 to 10 000 wireless  
handsets, depending on the model of Gateway, as listed in Table 3 "WLAN  
Table 3  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 models and capacities  
Maximum  
Model number  
NTTQ65AA  
NTTQ65BA  
NTTQ65CA  
NTTQ65DA  
NTTQ65EA  
NTTQ65FA  
number of users  
64  
128  
256  
512  
1024  
10 000  
Access Points  
802.11a, b, and g APs provide the connection between the wired Ethernet  
LAN and the wireless (802.11) LAN. APs must be positioned in all areas  
where the wireless handsets are used. The number and placement of APs  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Handset switchover 31  
affect the coverage area and capacity of the wireless system. Typically,  
the requirements for use of handsets are similar to that of other wireless  
data devices.  
The APs must be either SVP-compliant or WMM-compliant to support QoS.  
For a list of supported APs, see Appendix "Compatible Access Points"  
Handset switchover  
When a user on an active call is moving about, the call switches from AP to  
AP in the subnet. This changeover is transparent to the user.  
Loss of signal  
If a wireless handset is out of range of all APs, it waits 20 seconds for a  
signal to return. If a signal is not reacquired within 20 seconds, the wireless  
handset loses connection to the Call Server and any calls are dropped.  
When the wireless handset comes back into range of an AP, it reestablishes  
a connection to the Call Server and goes through the system registration  
process.  
Note: If a wireless handset is out of contact with the system for  
four seconds (worst case scenario) when the UNIStim messaging is  
occurring, a UNIStim failure could result, causing the wireless handset  
to lose the UNIStim association with the Line Telephony Proxy Server  
(LTPS).  
Handset switchover  
If a user on an active call is moving about, the call switches from AP to AP  
in the subnet. This changeover is transparent to the user.  
Loss of signal  
If a wireless handset is out of range of all APs, it waits 20 seconds for a  
signal to return. If a signal is not reacquired within 20 seconds, the wireless  
handset loses connection to the Call Server and any calls are dropped.  
When the wireless handset comes back into range of an AP, it reestablishes  
a connection to the Call Server and goes through the system registration  
process.  
ATTENTION  
If a wireless handset is out of contact with the system for four seconds (worst case  
scenario) during UNIStim messaging, a UNIStim failure could occur and cause  
the wireless handset to lose the UNIStim association with the Line Telephony  
Proxy Server (LTPS).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
32 Overview  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Planning  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Challenges of integrating voice applications  
The integration of voice applications on any data network causes some  
challenges. WLANs create a number of problems for voice, above and  
beyond those inherent to most data networks, such as:  
high overhead of 802.11  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
34 Planning  
rate scaling and variable capacity  
power adjustments and variable capacity  
Quality of Service (QoS)  
High overhead of 802.11  
Unlike many other 802.n standards, 802.11 has a very high amount of  
overhead associated with transmitting a packet. To compare an 802.3  
network with an 802.11 network, the difference in overhead for transmitting  
line-rate minimum frame sizes compared to the line-rate maximum frame  
sizes on an 802.3 network can be significant, yet not nearly as significant as  
on an 802.11 network.  
For 802.11, the difference in effective throughput varies dramatically with  
packet size because of the amount of overhead involved in transmitting  
a frame. Therefore, the effective throughput of the medium is potentially  
higher for data clients that use very large packet sizes than it is for voice  
clients that use smaller packets. As an example, using very conservative  
assumptions for average frame size, no rate scaling, and no contention or  
collisions, transmission overhead consumes as much as 67% of the total  
802.11 medium capacity. By contrast, in an 802.3 network using the same  
assumptions, the overhead is about 8%.  
Rate scaling and variable capacity  
802.11b supports four transmission rates or data rates. Usually, as a  
handset gets farther from an Access Point (AP), both devices scale down to  
lower transmission rates to compensate for a weaker signal. As a result,  
a transmission at the 5.5 megabits per second (Mb/s) data rate takes  
approximately twice as long as the same size packet transmitted at the 11  
Mb/s data rate. Longer transmission times mean less transmission time for  
other handsets. Therefore, rate scaling compromises the overall throughput  
of the medium.  
Rate scaling is necessary to extend the coverage of the AP beyond a very  
tight region around the AP, but the effects must be taken into account when  
determining medium capacity. For example, if the maximum call capacity for  
an AP is 12 when all handsets are using the 11 Mb/s physical (PHY) layer,  
two handsets scaling down to 5.5 Mb/s as they move away from the AP  
reduces the total call capacity of that AP to roughly 10. This factor makes  
engineering the number of APs for the network difficult, because handsets  
are roaming around and rate scaling up and down as necessary. Handsets  
are moving, and as they do, the engineering target of call capacity becomes  
a moving target.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Challenges of integrating voice applications 35  
Power adjustments and variable capacity  
A WLAN has dynamic mechanisms in place for adjusting channels,  
adjusting power, and filling coverage holes, all in response to changes in  
the Radio Frequency (RF) environment. All of these mechanisms present  
challenges to the engineering of voice networks.  
Dynamic adjustments work well for guaranteeing minimum coverage and  
connectivity of devices, particularly data devices. Voice requires more  
planned engineering.  
Usually, the number of calls per area (square foot) and calls per AP  
determines the number of APs required to support the voice applications  
and devices. Power adjustments affect these parameters. If an AP increases  
power, it provides coverage for a larger area, meaning a greater call demand  
for the AP. Doubling the power of an AP can quadruple its coverage area,  
which means up to four times as much call demand as originally engineered.  
That increased coverage area also has substantial portions of lower data  
rate coverage. In addition, the added cochannel interference to other cells  
using the same channel degrades their call capacity. The net effect is that  
a network previously tuned for voice is now less capable of meeting the  
demands of voice than it was before the dynamic power adjustment.  
Automatic RF changes do not always have a negative impact on  
voice-engineered networks. Admission control techniques help with the  
oversubscription problems related to increasing cell sizes dynamically. Hole  
filling, after an AP failure occurs, also provides substantial value to a voice  
solution.  
When VoWLAN drives the engineering of the network both in scale and  
capacity, sometimes automatic RF features create more challenges than  
they resolve.  
Quality of Service  
802.11 is a shared media technology, but only one device can use the  
media at a time. The AP abides by this rule as well.  
Because the transmitting device cannot detect collisions, 802.11 uses a  
statistical mechanism to reduce the possibility of collisions when two devices  
are ready to transmit at the same time. After the medium becomes available,  
the mechanism requires the devices to wait a random amount of time before  
starting transmission. Because of this simple mechanism, a nonvoice  
device is as equally as likely to be allowed to transmit as a voice device is.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
36 Planning  
For example, if a data device does seize the medium, it can send a  
1500-byte frame at the lowest data rate (if it is far away from the AP), and  
further delay voice frames. In addition, several data devices contending for  
the medium can each, in turn, send large frames before the voice device  
gained access to the medium.  
Without a way to give preferential transmission opportunities to voice  
devices, supporting voice applications is a tremendous challenge on 802.11  
WLANs. SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) has evolved into a de facto  
standard for Quality of Service (QoS) and serves as a model to illustrate the  
functions that a successful QoS mechanism can implement.  
The 802.11e standard ultimately resolves QoS issues, but the delays in the  
standard create a number of additional implementation-specific challenges.  
Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) is a step toward full 802.11e compliance for voice  
and multimedia, but it is not a solution. Because it is a step, QoS feature  
evolution must progress towards better and more solid standards-based  
QoS capabilities.  
WMM refines 802.11 to give statistical preference to certain classes over  
other classes. It is fully backward-compatible to legacy non-WMM devices,  
which function just like WMM best-effort class devices.  
DHCP server planning  
The handset IP-related parameters can be configured manually or through  
a DHCP server (RFC 1541 and RFC 1533). Any DHCP server can be used,  
but it must support the following capabilities.  
Provide Client IP address  
DHCP Option 1—Subnet Mask  
DHCP Option 3—Default Gateway  
DHCP Option 60—Class Identifier. The wireless handsets use the Class  
Identifier of Nortel-221x-A or Nortel-61xx-A. The DHCP server can use  
the string in the Class Identifier to uniquely identify a wireless handset.  
DHCP Option 66. This can be used to specify the address of the TFTP  
Server. If this option is not configured, the wireless handset looks at the  
Next server Boot server (siaddr) Option for the address of the TFTP  
Server* Vendor Specific Option 43, 128, 144, 157, 191, or 251. Only  
one of these options is required. The DHCP server encodes the Server  
1 information using the same format as the IP Phone 2004. If the Server  
2 information is also present in the option, it is ignored.  
DHCP Option 151. This option contains the IP address of the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245. If Option 151 is not configured, the wireless  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DHCP server planning 37  
handset performs a DNS lookup of the name SLNKSVP2, if Options 6  
(DNS Server) and 15 (Domain Name) are configured.  
DHCP Option 152. If an optional WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is  
used in the system, its IP address can be specified with this option.  
Each wireless handset effectively uses two IP addresses in the wireless  
subnet: one for the physical wireless handset and a second alias IP address  
that is used on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. When allocating  
addresses in a subnet scope on the DHCP server, a contiguous block of IP  
addresses as large as the number of wireless handsets supported must be  
marked as unavailable for distribution for other uses by the DHCP server.  
When multiple WLANs are connected to a single Nortel Wireless Security  
Switch (WSS), the DHCP server can require specific configuration  
modifications. For a specific WSS that is used for special DHCP  
configuration requirements, see the WSS documentation.  
The WLAN handsets support numerous DHCP extensions for assigning  
various configuration options. The WLAN handsets supply a vendor class  
identifier string, which in this case is Nortel-221x-A and Nortel-61xx-A.  
The WLAN handsets do not accept these options from the DHCP server  
encapsulated in a 43 Vendor Type option (which is the normal way vendor  
classes work). Consequently, you do not define these options as part of a  
vendor class on the DHCP server. Instead, you define them as new options  
that are assigned using the native code numbers that you give them.  
The WLAN handsets specifically request a list of options in the DISCOVER  
message. The list of options (aside from the IP address and subnet mask)  
needed by a WLAN handset is:  
Class Identifier (60)  
TFTP Server (66)  
Signaling Server Address and other parameters (43, 128, 144, 157,  
191, or 251)  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 Address (151)  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 Address (152)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38 Planning  
Figure 2  
Sample DHCP reservation showing assigned parameters  
Another use for the DHCP server is to make code upgrades to the handset  
easier. To prevent handsets from checking for code upgrades, assign the  
value of 255.255.255.255 for the TFTP server address.  
A problem can arise for handset users who travel. For example, the  
company employing the handset solution is a retailer with many stores.  
Each store has a local call server for the local employees who use various  
VoIP devices, so all the attributes are defined at the scope level. What  
happens if supervisors, who travel from store to store, want to use their  
handsets at each location? The supervisors can be assigned to a signaling  
server that does not recognize their phones. The best way to support these  
users is to create unique reservations in each remote scope for each user’s  
WLAN handset and specify the proper signaling server. This solution can  
be cumbersome if there are a large number of users who travel.  
TFTP Server planning  
A TFTP Server (RFC1350) holds the software images for updating the  
handsets and the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. After the IP address  
of the TFTP server is configured on a wireless handset, each time the  
wireless handset is powered on, the wireless handset checks its version of  
firmware against the firmware on the TFTP Server, and if the version is  
different, the wireless handset downloads the new firmware from the TFTP  
Server. Similarly, when a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 reboots, or  
is manually reset by the operator, it checks its version of software against  
the version on the TFTP Server. If the versions are different, the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 downloads the new software.  
The WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 and WLAN Handsets 6120/6140  
share the same configuration file that provides firmware version information  
for the TFTP process. The actual software files are specific to either the  
WLAN Handset 2200 series or the WLAN Handset 6100 series. At an  
installation, which uses both the WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 and the  
WLAN Handsets 6120/6140, the software files for both handset series must  
be installed and available on the TFTP server for the site.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TFTP Server planning 39  
Only one TFTP server is needed in the network, and it need not be  
colocated with the handsets or the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
There is a client-dependent aspect to how the handsets function with the  
TFTP server. How well a server works with the handsets can vary between  
code versions on the handset.  
You can configure handsets to not contact the TFTP server upon boot up, by  
configuring 255.255.255.255 as the IP address for the TFTP server (either  
directly in the handset or through the DHCP option). You can configure  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to not contact the TFTP server by  
changing the TFTP server address to none in the configuration.  
The following information must be considered when planning for a TFTP  
Server:  
The process for the wireless handset to check its version of firmware  
against what is available on the TFTP Server takes less than two  
seconds on a quiet network.  
If the TFTP Server is offline or unreachable, the wireless handset tries  
for about 10 seconds before giving up and using its existing version  
of firmware.  
The wireless handset firmware downloading process takes about 30  
seconds.  
The TFTP Server must be capable of supporting multiple TFTP sessions.  
When a wireless handset makes a TFTP request, it uses file names  
without a full path name. Therefore, software updates for the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 and handsets must be installed into the root  
directory of the TFTP Server.  
When the software files are uploaded to the TFTP server. they must be  
unzipped. Allow time for the TFTP server to refresh and be aware of the files  
before attempting to download software to the wireless handsets and WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245. Monitor the TFTP Server for any errors.  
The TFTP Server can be located anywhere on the network if the wireless  
handsets have the subnet mask and default IP gateway configured correctly.  
However, the wireless handset expects a response within two seconds to  
any TFTP request. Therefore, the TFTP Server must not be located, for  
example, at the other end of a slow WAN link.  
If too many wireless handsets are attempting to download new software  
simultaneously, the downloads can slow down or return error messages. To  
reduce the number of retries and error messages, manage the download  
process by staggering the times the wireless handsets download the  
software.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 Planning  
Nortel has tested the following TFTP servers. They are listed in order of  
preference.  
Nortel TFTP server (ONMS application)  
3COM TFTP  
PumpkinTFTP  
Syslog Server planning  
A Syslog Server listens for incoming syslog messages on UDP port 514 and  
then processes the messages according to local administrative procedures.  
Usually the syslog messages are logged for subsequent review by the  
system operator. A number of devices used within a handset wireless  
configuration are capable of sending messages to a Syslog Server.  
The Syslog Server can be any RFC 3164-compliant log server. You can  
configure the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246, WLAN APs 2220/2221/2230/2231, and the WLAN Handsets  
2210/2211/2212/6120/6140 to generate syslog messages. For information  
about configuring syslog messages, see the documentation for the Wireless  
Security Switches and WLAN APs. For information about configuring syslog  
messages on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, see "Configure the  
There are numerous third-party Syslog Servers available. You can use any  
RFC 3164-compliant Syslog Server.  
Access point planning  
APs utilize radio frequencies to transmit signals to and from the wireless  
handsets.  
It is essential to know where to install the APs to provide effective coverage  
for wireless handset use. It is necessary to verify that coverage is available  
where it is needed. The first step is to define exactly where the coverage is  
needed, which requires a site survey.  
Recommendation  
A site survey must be performed before installing a wireless LAN. A site survey  
is also recommended when an existing network structure is modified or when  
physical changes are made to a site.  
Nortel recommends the use of the Nortel Site Survey Tool to perform the site  
survey.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access point planning 41  
A site survey is critical to designing and implementing a wireless LAN. The  
site survey is used to determine the number of APs needed to support the  
wireless handset users and to determine the best placement of the APs.  
Different AP vendors provide different tools to do this.  
Site survey  
To conduct a site survey, set up an AP at a particular location. Use a  
computer equipped with a wireless LAN device and site survey software  
or a handset operating in Site Survey mode to measure the strength of  
the signal from the AP. Move the wireless device around and repeat the  
measurements to determine the optimum number and best locations for  
the APs. This method helps identify dead zones and areas where building  
materials or other factors affect the performance of the network.  
Site Survey mode  
The handset Site Survey mode displays negative dBm levels. These levels  
represent the strength of the received signal (Received Signal Strength  
Indication or RSSI) from an AP. The RSSI information aids in determining if  
WLAN coverage is adequate.  
For information about using the Site Survey mode, see WLAN Handsets  
Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
Note: The handsets do not require connectivity to a 2245 IP Telephony  
Manager or the Call Server to enable the Site Survey mode to be  
used. The minimum configuration required is the Extended Service  
Set Identifier (ESSID) of the WLAN or test AP and the WEP keys, if  
applicable.  
Access point requirement considerations for b radio  
Each site is unique in its AP requirements. Consider the following points  
when determining how many APs are needed and where to place them:  
Minimum Radio Signal Strength—All APs in the coverage area must  
receive a signal strength better than -70dBm. Measurement is made in  
negative dBm, which measure the amount of signal loss due to distance.  
Therefore, stronger signals are those with smaller values. For example,  
-50 and -60 indicate stronger signals than -70; -80 is a weaker, poorer  
signal than -70.  
Adjacent APs and channel interference—In order to avoid undesirable  
interference from adjacent APs, ensure that adjacent APs do not use  
channels that overlap on the same frequencies.  
42). In the figure, channels on the same horizontal line do not overlap.  
In the coverage area of any given AP, signals from other APs using  
overlapping channels must be at least -15 to -20dBm weaker. Because  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
42 Planning  
the Site Survey mode displays signals only from APs on the same  
Extended Service Set ID (ESSID), check for signals from APs using all  
ESSIDs to avoid channel overlap.  
Figure 3  
Frequencies used by b radio  
Wireless handset range—Wireless LAN coverage must be available  
wherever wireless handsets are used. Although the typical range  
for a wireless handset is comparable to that of a laptop computer  
utilizing a wireless LAN PC Card, the range can not be exactly the  
same. Therefore, it is preferable to use a handset to carry out the site  
survey, if possible. Remember that wireless handsets might be used in  
areas where data devices are not typically used, such as stairwells,  
washrooms, hallways, and outdoor areas.  
Number of wireless handsets per AP—Estimate the number of wireless  
handsets and the anticipated call volume per AP area to ensure that the  
maximum number of calls per AP is not exceeded. For the maximum  
number of calls per AP for each supported manufacturer, see Appendix  
The data rates at which the wireless handsets operate—Higher data  
rates (such as 11Mbs) can only be sustained while well within the range  
of the AP. If the wireless handsets are operating near the limits of the  
radio frequency (RF) coverage from the AP, they automatically drop  
to 1 Mbs operation.  
handsets require approximately:  
— 7% of available bandwidth per call at 11 Mbs operation  
— 10% of the available bandwidth per call for 2 Mbs operation  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access point planning 43  
— 15% of the available bandwidth per call for 1 Mbs operation.  
Note: These requirements mean that areas with a high-use density  
must receive RF coverage at the highest data rate of operation.  
LAN bandwidth—Estimate anticipated peak call volume to ensure that  
enough bandwidth is available to handle the network traffic generated  
by all the wireless handsets. Handsets require approximately 150 kbps  
of bandwidth per call. Network traffic can be monitored and analyzed  
using a network sniffer or an SNMP workstation.  
Number of other wireless devices per AP—The wireless handsets can  
share bandwidth with other wireless devices. To ensure adequate RF  
bandwidth availability, consider the number of wireless data devices in  
use per AP.  
Note: In a very large or complex site, it can be advisable to contract  
a professional site survey.  
Effective site survey  
Consider the following points for an effective site survey.  
Network usage  
Examine the network usage:  
How many people use a wireless handset?  
What areas of the site require wireless handset access?  
How many hours each day are wireless handsets typically in use?  
Which locations are likely to generate the largest amount of traffic?  
Where is future network expansion most likely?  
Mobility requirements  
Assess the mobility requirements:  
How many wireless handset users are in motion continually, such as in  
a warehouse or hospital?  
How many users work from different fixed locations throughout the site?  
Physical site study  
Perform a study of the physical site:  
Study blueprints of the proposed site. A site blueprint provides a map of  
the site, including the location of objects such as walls, partitions, and  
anything else that could affect the performance of a wireless handset.  
This helps identify areas where wireless handsets are less likely to  
perform well. Many obstructions are not readily visible and, in some  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
44 Planning  
cases, a room originally built for a specific purpose, such as a radiology  
lab, can be converted into something completely different, such as a  
conference room. The blueprint can also show areas proposed for  
future building expansion.  
Mark possible wireless handset usage locations on the blueprint and  
refer to the marked blueprint during the physical walk-through and  
inventory.  
Walk-through and survey  
Conduct a physical walk-through and survey:  
Document any items or materials near a proposed AP location that might  
interfere with reception or transmission and affect wireless handset  
performance, such as metal shelving.  
Document stock and inventory levels, current environmental conditions,  
and any materials that can interfere with wireless handset transmissions.  
Walk around the site with a site survey tool before installing APs.  
Use two portable computers with wireless hardware operating on a  
point-to-point basis. Using diagnostic software provided by the AP  
vendor, a coverage area for a potential AP can be determined by  
keeping one portable computer in one place and moving around with the  
other computer. Check with the vendor as to what tools are provided  
and what approach is recommended for deploying their APs.  
RF transmission testing  
After the APs are installed and configured, measure the strength of the  
Radio Frequency (RF) transmissions. Signal strength testing ensures that all  
usage areas have adequate coverage. This can be performed in two ways.  
1. Use the handsets to determine AP signal strength using the Site Survey  
mode.  
2. Use two portable computers with wireless hardware operating on a  
point-to-point basis. Using diagnostic software provided by the AP  
vendor, a coverage area for a potential AP can be determined by  
keeping one portable computer in one place and moving around with the  
other computer. Check with the vendor as to which tools are provided  
and which approach is recommended for deploying their APs.  
Adjust the APs as needed.  
Example of AP placement  
example of an AP placement diagram based on the results of a site survey.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access point planning 45  
Figure 4  
Sample AP placement diagram for b radio  
Solving coverage issues  
To resolve coverage issues, add and relocate APs.  
Solving overlap issues  
To resolve overlap issues, reassign channels to the APs or relocate the  
APs. Like channels require 15–20dBm separation. See Figure 5 "b radio  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
46 Planning  
Figure 5  
b radio assignment  
For more information about overlap, see the AP vendor documentation.  
Network planning  
You must ensure that all connections and interfaces for the IP Telephony  
network are configured as full-duplex. Duplex mismatches anywhere on the  
WLAN can cause the wireless IP Telephony system not to function normally.  
Network recommendation  
To maximize security and to minimize accessibility for unnecessary traffic  
to reach the WLAN Handsets, Nortel recommends that you adopt the  
following measures:  
Create a separate VLAN for voice traffic and map the handsets to this  
VLAN to mask the handsets from other devices on the network.  
Implement Access Control Lists (ACLs) on the WLAN infrastructure to  
contain the handsets but deny other traffic.  
— The WLAN IP Telephony 2245 uses IP protocol 119 and  
encapsulates both signalling and media (RTP) into a common packet  
format allowing the access points to prioritize legitimate handset  
traffic.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Network management 47  
— Necessary traffic for instance DHCP must be allowed, while all other  
traffic is denied.  
Sample Access Control List  
The following is a sample ACL for a voice VLAN named VLAN120.  
set security acl ip SpectraLink permit udp 0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
eq 68 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 eq 67  
set security acl ip SpectraLink permit udp 0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
eq 67 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 eq 68  
set security acl ip SpectraLink permit cos 6 udp 0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 eq 69  
set security acl ip SpectraLink permit cos 7 119 0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255  
set security acl ip SpectraLink deny 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255  
commit security acl SpectraLink  
set security acl map SpectraLink vlan VLAN120 in  
set security acl map SpectraLink vlan VLAN120 out  
Network management  
Network management is as much strategy and process as it is applications.  
Managing a converged network consists of four key phases:  
1
Assessment—Network Health Checks and WLAN Site Surveys  
(post-deployment) are critical assessment items. The main goal is to  
verify the ability of the network to provide voice at the required Quality  
of Experience (QoE).  
2
3
4
Predeployment—Before you deploy VoIP handsets, make the network  
ready by rolling-out QoS across the network. This phase assumes the  
WLAN itself is already deployed.  
Ongoing monitoring—Regularly monitor the performance of the  
converged network to ensure that voice quality continues to meet  
expectations as the network grows and evolves over time.  
Reporting and planning—Keep track of exceptions and problems and  
form plans to resolve issues. The resolution of problems takes you  
back through the assessment, predeployment (QoS configuration), and  
monitoring phases again.  
Nortel ties this business cycle together seamlessly with a set of products  
that provide a comprehensive solution. This solution is comprised of  
integrated and innovative standards-based technologies, such as Real  
Time Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP-XR) for detailed real-time  
management of calls in progress. The overall solution is referred to as  
Proactive Voice Quality Management (PVQM).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
48 Planning  
Assessment through a WLAN site survey  
Technical support for VoWLAN is contingent on customers performing a  
site survey of the WLAN. Currently, Nortel recommends the use of the  
Ekahau Site Survey tool to verify the network deployment, although other  
site survey tools are acceptable. The Ekahau product runs on a PC and  
uses a WLAN network interface card (NIC) to collect data for analysis. The  
output of the tool is a number of robust visualizations of the network. The  
software verifies the basic coverage of the network and provides a number  
of visualizations that are useful for VoWLAN deployments.  
Perform capacity planning using the data rate analysis view, which shows a  
color-coded view of the maximum data rate across all APs in the network.  
With this view, you can see where your handsets can use the 11 Mb/s data  
rate as opposed to scaling down to lower rates. Planning based on data rate  
can have a big impact on voice-call-capacity planning.  
Predict AP selection and roaming using the strongest AP view. This view  
shows the AP with the strongest signal for each location in the building  
and uses color codes for each AP. With the AP view, you can predict the  
APs that are likely to be the primary choice of voice devices to use given  
their location. You can also predict where the handoff to another AP (and  
which AP) can occur for a moving user.  
Perform resiliency planning through the AP reachability view. This view  
presents a color-coded visualization of the number of reachable APs  
from each point in the network. Locations where the tool detects one AP,  
locations where the tool detects two APs, locations where the tool detects  
three APs, and so on, are marked in distinct colors. With this visualization,  
you can see where the network is vulnerable to a single point of failure. It is  
preferable to have at least two APs that are capable of offering coverage to  
every point in the building.  
You can also use the AP reachability view to perform location service  
planning. A minimum of three APs must be reachable for triangulation to be  
effective. Therefore, use the AP reachability feature to verify a consistent  
3+ AP coverage across the building.  
Location capabilities have a number of client dependencies, so verifying  
triangulation coverage is more complex than it appears. There are two  
main location-solution types:  
those that use the client to collect information about the APs in the  
network (client-based location)  
those that use the APs to collect information about the client  
(network-based location)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network management 49  
Both location-solution types use a form of triangulation to compute the  
location of the device. Depending on the power level of the AP, it can  
sometimes hear devices that it cannot transmit to. These factors combined  
create the following two scenarios:  
It is difficult to calibrate network-based solutions by using a laptop  
running the site survey, because APs can sometimes hear clients  
that cannot hear the AP. If AP transmission power levels are not at  
a maximum, they can hear clients over a greater distance than their  
own transmissions can travel. This scenario can cause the site survey  
application to underestimate the number of APs that can participate  
in triangulation.  
Client-based solutions cannot triangulate APs that are not detectable  
because their power is lower. But the site survey application can  
accurately reflect the number of APs that can be used for triangulation.  
Assessment using NetIQ Vivinet Assessor  
The Network Health Check is probably the most critical step toward  
ensuring a smooth rollout for any VoIP deployment. This statement applies  
even more so to VoWLAN, because a WLAN is a more challenging QoS  
environment than modern wired networks.  
The NetIQ Vivinet Assessor 3.0 or later is the tool of choice for network  
health checking. (Previously NetIQ Chariot, now an Ixia product, was  
recommended for network health checking.) This product uses a laptop  
(for WLAN testing for WLAN mobility) as a voice-traffic generation and  
analysis tool. You can configure several nodes in various parts of the  
network, to simulate calls to and from those areas. Each node simulates  
call volumes through traffic generation so that you can stress-test access  
links, backbones, and WAN links as necessary. You can also configure  
codecs, packetization rates, and other factors to closely mimic the future  
VoIP environment.  
Vivinet Assessor performs a comprehensive analysis of the simulated  
traffic, including reports on delay, jitter, and packet loss. The R values or  
Mean Opinion Score (MOS) are reported for these simulated traffic loads  
to provide a baseline for performance expectations. These analyses are  
also used for capacity planning because they show the capacity at which  
the Quality of Experience (QoE) ratings start to fall. More importantly, the  
process of analyzing the network reveals many latent network problems that  
can otherwise remain undetected until deployment.  
For example, duplex mismatches can exist in various locations of the  
network, and data applications, being very tolerant to packet loss, typically  
do not reveal the problem unless it is severe. The issue is immediately  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50 Planning  
noticeable when a voice call traverses such a link. Vivinet Assessor is  
extremely useful for identifying the symptoms of issues and fixing such  
problem areas in the network long before the customer places the first call.  
Monitoring and reporting with Enterprise Network Monitoring System  
Enterprise Network Monitoring System (ENMS) 10.5 is a cross-portfolio  
management platform for fault management, network visualization, and  
troubleshooting. It can receive traps and statistics from the CS 1000, as  
well as virtually all other Nortel products. It can:  
discover the call server equipment that it supports  
display the information for the slot or port to which the call server  
components are attached  
discover the TLAN and ELAN connections on a CS 1000 Signaling  
Server  
ENMS differs from the Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager in  
that ENMS is a comprehensive monitoring platform for virtually all Nortel  
products, while Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager supports  
only VoIP products and features. ENMS is the product that ties all the other  
management packages together.  
ENMS 10.5 makes convergence management quick and easy with the  
Converged View in the new IP Service Management (IPSM) display. The  
IPSM display provides a business-oriented overview of the Convergence  
Service. With IPSM, an operator can see the status of overall service level  
that is being provided, and easily zoom in with detailed troubleshooting  
tools if a problem is indicated. If a phone is unreachable, or if there is a  
degradation of quality in a call, it is indicated in the IPSM tabular view. The  
call quality alert shows the near-end and far-end IP address and Terminal  
Number (TN).  
with a list of the phones that are registered to a particular CS 1000 system.  
Many details, including type of phone, firmware revision, IP address, set TN,  
registered TN, source, and destination IP port are displayed. Phones or  
components of the CS 1000 system change color to indicate status. The pie  
chart in the lower left corner of the display updates to show overall status  
and quality of the phones and CS 1000 systems in the display.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network management 51  
Figure 6  
ENMS 10.5 IPSM overview  
After you click on a specific IP Phone, the panel in the lower right portion of  
the screen displays details automatically, such as the CS 1000 system, with  
which the IP Phone is registered. You can then right-click on the phone to  
show a data network path trace graphically, as shown in Figure 7 "ENMS  
For troubleshooting purposes, you can view a path trace to the signaling  
server or any other IP address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52 Planning  
Figure 7  
ENMS 10.5 IPSM convergence view  
ENMS can provide down to physical slot port connectivity for the wired  
network. This topology data is extremely useful when shown in the  
Converged View of a Path Trace. You can set the display to refresh  
periodically to display the latest information about IP address changes.  
With RTCP-XR, you can right-click on the set in the IPSM Convergence  
or tabular view and retrieve detailed real-time set statistics, such as local  
and remote latency and jitter.  
Monitoring and reporting with Communication Server 1000 Telephony  
Manager  
Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager is an element manager  
for the CS 1000, as well as a platform for receiving traps and collecting  
call statistics and other performance-related data. Call and performance  
statistics are collected from the CS 1000 and stored on the Communication  
Server 1000 Telephony Manager server. You can display this data in a  
number of graphical reporting views, many of which are predefined for ease  
of use. With these features, the Communication Server 1000 Telephony  
Manager server can act in a basic performance-management role for voice  
(this is not the same thing as Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring) within  
the management framework.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network management 53  
Call tracking is another feature that is not specifically related to QoS  
monitoring or fault monitoring, but that is important to solution manageability.  
With this feature, you can:  
track calls that fit defined profiles and collect data for later trend analysis  
monitor individual extensions in real time  
have alarm notifications sent to pagers or workstations for calls that  
fit specified profiles  
Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager can perform some  
alarm-management functions and is a trap receiver for the voice products  
it supports. It polls call servers, through SNMP, for additional alarms  
that are not sent as traps. Alarms can be received from the CS 1000.  
Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager can display fault  
information locally and also send the traps on to ENMS, Vivinet Manager, or  
other management platforms.  
Monitoring and reporting with NetiQ Vivinet Assessor, Vivinet  
AppManager, and Vivinet Diagnostics  
Vivinet Assessor is a Network Health Check and diagnostics tool. The  
software also has a number of features for the ongoing monitoring and  
reporting of issues. You can install Performance Endpoint agents on laptops  
that have WLAN interfaces, to monitor the performance and quality of the  
WLAN. Send this data to the Vivinet Manager for reporting and analysis.  
You can configure the agents with a schedule for generating VoIP traffic to  
run spot checks on the ability of the network to support VoIP at required  
quality levels.  
Vivinet AppManager is a product that can be purchased separately and  
used in conjunction with Vivinet Diagnostics to provide detailed service-level  
monitoring, reporting, and troubleshooting in a diverse network environment.  
For the CS 1000, Vivnet AppManager provides information about the  
percentage of devices available versus unavailable, health of interfaces,  
Voice Call Quality and QoS for Signaling Server, and Voice Gateway Media  
Cards. AppManager also provides summary analysis for data loss, jitter,  
latency, and R-Value.  
Vivinet Diagnostics is a product that can be purchased separately and used  
in conjunction with Vivinet AppManager. After Vivinet AppManager receives  
a call-quality alert from a Nortel voice system such as a CS 1000 or BCM  
for a call in progress, AppManager generates an alert.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
54 Planning  
The alert from Vivinet AppManager activates Vivinet Diagnostics, which  
traces the path of the call, collects diagnostic information, and can perform  
root cause analysis. You can save the results for further analysis and action.  
Figure 8  
NetiQ Vivinet Diagnostics example  
Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager  
You can configure voice devices, from stations to communication servers  
(including CS 1000), from the Communication Server 1000 Telephony  
Manager server. You can also perform station administration through the  
Communication Server 1000 Telephony Manager.  
Although it has bulk configuration capabilities, the Communication Server  
1000 Telephony Manager best serves small- to medium-size environments.  
For larger VoIP installations, Enterprise Subscriber Manager is a more  
scalable set-management platform.  
Perform the actual configuration of the WLAN handsets manually or use the  
DHCP server. Configure the call server aspects of the handset (such as  
TN and DN) on the CS 1000, preferably through the Communication Server  
1000 Telephony Manager.  
Zones  
Nortel recommends that the handsets be assigned to dedicated zones. The  
zones can be used to manage the bandwidth of the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 groups. As well, zone designations can be used to list the  
wireless handsets that are currently registered or are registered using LD  
117 commands.  
For more information, see "Bandwidth management" (page 77).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other network design considerations 55  
Other network design considerations  
WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212 are 802.11b-only devices and the  
WLAN Handsets 6120/6140 are 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11a devices,  
which creates challenging choices for network deployments. The following  
list describes some of the points to consider when determining network  
deployment:  
Separation of devices by multiple SSIDs on the same radio does not  
create multiple shared mediums—the devices still transmit and receive  
using common radio resources on a common channel.  
Current QoS mechanisms in the industry are most effective at protecting  
and prioritizing traffic on the downstream, that is, from AP to Mobile  
Unit (MU). Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) improves upstream prioritization  
by giving a statistical edge to different classes of devices so they  
are more likely to transmit ahead of lower class devices. Still, other  
devices sometimes cheat on the contention window to gain a statistical  
advantage, though there are drawbacks to this method. There is no  
real arbitration or coordination between multiple devices that need to  
transmit packets upstream.  
The 802.11g devices in a mixed 802.11b/g network are statistically  
favored by a 2:1 ratio over 802.11b devices. For example, this means  
that if there is one 802.11g device and one 802.11b device and both are  
trying to saturate the medium with a data transfer, the 802.11g device  
transmits, on average, two frames for every one frame from the 802.11b  
device. If there are two 802.11g devices for every one 802.11b device,  
on average, four 802.11g transmissions occur before one 802.11b  
transmission occurs.  
Although 802.11g devices transmit more often, because of higher data  
rates, they spend less time transmitting packets. This means that  
802.11g devices are not necessarily favored in the network. Having too  
many 802.11g devices relative to 802.11b devices upsets this balance.  
There is no easy way to determine whether to maintain an 802.11g-only  
network or an 802.11b-only network. If there is a significant amount  
of upstream traffic from data devices, the best course of action is to  
keep data devices off the 802.11b/g network entirely. Large numbers of  
802.11g devices can also cause problems with 802.11b handsets on the  
medium. However, if you force the 802.11g devices to use 802.11b for  
communication, the situation can become worse.  
Disabling 802.11g support and maintaining a dual-mode 802.11a/b network  
can make 802.11a more attractive for dual-mode data clients and reduce  
the amount of data devices using the 2.4 GHz spectrum. Enabling 802.11g  
support can increase the number of data devices sharing the 2.4 GHz  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
56 Planning  
channels, which is detrimental to voice devices. As a general policy, for  
large amounts of data, use 802.11a for data and 802.11b for voice, but  
leave 802.11g disabled.  
Alternately, if there are few 802.11b/g data devices and the WLAN is to be  
used primarily for voice, consider enabling 802.11g support. The goal is to  
carefully control the number of data devices that share radio resources  
with voice devices.  
For example, if a large number of laptops exist in a campus and if 802.11g  
mode is enabled, it is probable that a large proportion of those laptops use  
802.11g (2.4 GHz) for connectivity, which makes it much more difficult to  
provide good quality voice for handsets. If 802.11g is disabled, it is probable  
that a large proportion of those laptops use 802.11a (5 GHz) because it  
offers much higher throughput compared with 802.11b, and voice quality  
benefits.  
Access Point interference  
When more than three APs are deployed, the APs themselves are a  
significant source of interference. This is known as cochannel interference.  
Therefore, it is important to consider how channel reuse impacts network  
capacity.  
To maximize the distance between APs operating on the same channel, tile  
the channels. To scale capacity, add more APs in the same geographic  
region and at the same time, reduce the transmit power of each AP.  
However, the overall throughput increase does not increase proportionally  
with the number of APs that are added because each individual AP loses  
throughput, even though the number of APs per square foot is increasing.  
Note that the biggest loss of per-AP throughput occurs when going from  
nonchannel-reuse to reusing channels. For more information about this  
subject, see the whitepaper available from www.nortel.com.  
The goal is to achieve the required call density for the number of calls  
per square foot. Getting the most calls per AP is not a useful objective of  
capacity planning. The parameters that must be tuned to engineer a voice  
network for capacity are:  
channel reuse factor (that is, the number of channels in the channel plan)  
transmit power of each AP  
the radius of the cell (that is, based on the physical distance between  
APs)  
Because of the complexity of this topic and the simulation data that is  
required, it is not possible to discuss tuning all three variables or even two  
variables at a time. An example of a light to medium office environment  
(mostly cube space but some walls) is provided instead.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other network design considerations 57  
Example  
The channel reuse factor for 802.11b networks is fixed at three (three  
nonoverlapping channels in the 2.4 GHz range), corresponding to channels  
1, 6, and 11. The transmit power is fixed at 50 mW, which establishes the  
radius of the cell.  
Now the effects of cell size, based on the other fixed parameters, can be  
compared.  
If the deployed cells have a radius of anywhere from 33 ft to 75 ft, the call  
capacity per square foot is essentially the same. This means that packing  
cells in tighter than a 75 ft radius per AP is a waste of money. This example  
shows that in a typical office environment with APs at half power, you can  
deploy APs anywhere from 100 ft to 150 ft from each other. More walls  
mean there must be less distance between APs, and lowering the power  
of the AP lessens the required distance between APs, both of which also  
serve to increase the net call density.  
SSID options and limitations  
The traditional WLAN deployment requirement was to implement separate  
SSIDs for voice and for data. This requirement no longer exists, though it is  
still a useful deployment option in some circumstances.  
If all devices implement common security encryption mechanisms (for  
example, Wi-Fi Protected Access), a single SSID can be offered to support  
both voice and data. The benefit of this configuration is that users cannot  
control to which network they connect. This is a security mechanism  
that prevents curious or malicious users from putting their laptops in the  
telephony VLAN. At the same time, it prevents inadvertent configuration  
mistakes. Either way, the simplified user interface to the network benefits  
both network administrators and end users.  
If data devices do not use the same encryption mechanism as WLAN  
handsets, it is best to implement multiple SSIDs—one for the handsets  
and the other for the data devices.  
If necessary, one way to ensure that multiple handset SSIDs on the same  
AP still work without oversubscribing the medium is to cut in half the number  
of calls per AP configured on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Nortel does not recommend a closed system for VoWLAN installations that  
use more than one SSID, including converged data and voice WLANs.  
The reason is that the SSID serves a valuable purpose in roaming. When  
it is hidden by not being included in the beacon, roaming devices must  
attempt to try all closed system APs. This result can dramatically impact  
call handoff times.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
58 Planning  
Layer 3 implementation  
Where possible, simplify the number of subnets that are used for client  
devices. Even in a Distributed Campus architecture, you can have a few  
central subnets for clients. As a general rule, Nortel recommends that  
wired or wireless IP phones be placed in a separate VLAN (subnet) from  
data devices. This placement can be accomplished by providing one VLAN  
(subnet) for all WLAN telephony devices, as shown in Figure 9 "Single  
telephony VLAN implementation" (page 58). The data client VLAN design is  
an abstraction (the best practice is to simplify). The WLAN data network  
can have many client subnets, or one— that is unimportant in this context  
because the focus is support of VoWLAN.  
Figure 9  
Single telephony VLAN implementation  
Consolidating VoWLAN handsets into one VLAN (subnet) has a few  
advantages. First, it allows the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 design  
to be greatly simplified. Instead of purchasing and deploying at least one  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 per voice subnet, you can now install  
one WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 for the single voice subnet. For  
larger VoWLAN deployments, more WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s  
may be required in that single subnet to support the number of calls;  
however, fewer WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s are needed than in an  
equivalent multisubnet deployment.  
A second advantage is that external security measures are easier and  
less costly to implement. It is common practice to put a telephony WLAN  
behind a firewall for security reasons. This is because security features on  
handsets, particularly authentication capabilities, tend to lag behind the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 planning 59  
industry. So to mitigate risks, you can use a firewall to block all but the  
ports needed for IP Telephony. This practice becomes complex and costly  
when multiplied by a number of subnets. A more cost-effective alternative  
to implementing a firewall is to assign private addresses to the handsets  
and let the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 network address translation  
(NAT) capabilities serve as a form of secure firewall to the telephony LAN  
(T-LAN). Of course this is not as secure as using a traditional firewall to  
secure the T-LAN.  
The downside of putting all telephony devices into the same subnet is that  
broadcasts are increased. Also, while security is simplified, the importance  
of implementing adequate security measures increases because more  
devices will be impacted in the event of a security breach.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 planning  
Both the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and the WLAN Application  
Telephony Gateway 2246 are connected to the Ethernet switch.  
Installation requirements  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 requires a CAT5 cable connection  
between its network port and the Ethernet switch. The WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 can auto-negotiate to the type of port on the Ethernet switch.  
It supports 10BaseT, 100BaseT, full-duplex and half-duplex port types.  
Nortel recommends 100BaseT full-duplex.  
Note: When multiple WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 are used, all  
the WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 must use a uniform media type.  
Do not use full-duplex on some and half-duplex on others, or 10BaseT  
on some and 100BaseT on others.  
Capacities  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is available in three models:  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-80: Serves 500 powered-on  
handsets (80 simultaneous calls).  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-20: Serves 20 powered-on  
handsets.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-10: Serves 10 powered-on  
handsets.  
Capacity is measured by active calls for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245-80 and by powered on handsets for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245-10 and the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-20. The capacity  
of a system that is not based on 100Base-T, full-duplex is lower. Nortel  
recommends that you not use older technology equipment.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
60 Planning  
In any subnet where wireless handsets are used, each subnet must have  
one or more WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245. A WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 group on a subnet consists of one or more WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245 and their associated wireless handsets. Only  
one master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be on a subnet.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 groups  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 groups are those that have more than  
one WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 in order to accommodate larger  
systems and a higher volume of wireless telephony traffic.  
Master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
In a group comprised of multiple WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245, a  
master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 must be identified and must  
be configured with a static IP address. The wireless handsets and the  
other WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 locate the master by using  
the static IP address of the master. The loss of a nonmaster WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 does not significantly affect the operation of  
the remaining WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245. However, the loss  
of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 results in a loss of all  
communication between all the WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245. This  
causes the loss of all active calls, and wireless handsets cannot check in  
until communication with the master is reestablished.  
Group capacities  
The number of calls that an individual WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
can support is dependent on the number of WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245s in the subnet. Assuming that a 100 Mb/s full-duplex connection to the  
network exists, a single stand-alone WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can  
manage up to 80 active calls. If two WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s  
are installed in a master/slave configuration, each can support up to 64  
active calls for a total of 128 calls.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 planning 61  
61) lists the call capacities for WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-80  
2245-20 capacities" (page 62) lists the handset capacities for WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245-10 and 2245-20 groups.  
Table 4  
Multiple WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-80 capacities  
Number of  
WLAN IP  
Telephony  
Managers  
2245  
Calls per  
WLAN IP  
Telephony  
Manager  
2245  
Number of  
wireless  
handsets  
10% use  
Number of  
wireless  
handsets  
15% use  
Number of  
wireless  
handsets  
20% use  
Total  
calls  
Erlangs  
65  
1
2
80  
64  
60  
58  
57  
56  
56  
55  
55  
55  
55  
54  
54  
54  
54  
54  
80  
500  
433  
325  
555  
128  
180  
232  
285  
336  
392  
440  
495  
550  
605  
648  
702  
756  
810  
874  
111  
160  
211  
262  
312  
367  
415  
469  
524  
578  
621  
674  
728  
782  
836  
1000  
1500  
2000  
2500  
3000  
3500  
4000  
4500  
5000  
5500  
6000  
6500  
7000  
7500  
8000  
740  
3
1067  
1407  
1747  
2080  
2447  
2767  
3127  
3493  
3853  
4140  
4493  
4853  
5213  
5573  
800  
4
1055  
1310  
1560  
1835  
2075  
2345  
2620  
2890  
3105  
3370  
3640  
3910  
4180  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
62 Planning  
Table 5  
Multiple WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245-10 and 2245-20 capacities  
Number of  
WLAN IP  
Telephony  
Managers  
2245  
Number of handsets  
WLAN IP  
Telephony  
Manager  
Number of handsets  
WLAN IP  
Telephony  
Manager  
2245-10  
2245-20  
1
2
3
4
10  
20  
30  
40  
20  
40  
not applicable  
not applicable  
For example, if there are two subnets for handsets in a campus and some  
handsets are directed to one subnet and some to the other, there are two  
Call Admission Control domains operating independently. Specifically, if  
both specified a limit of seven calls for each AP, it is possible to have seven  
calls admitted by each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 on the same  
AP—therefore, the AP is oversubscribed by 2:1.  
If multiple subnets are required, the best way to support them is to leverage  
the Layer 3 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 design. With this design, the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s are all in one subnet but SVP is routed  
from the second client subnet. Although this is a supported configuration,  
all the engineering guidelines for latency, jitter, and packet loss must still be  
maintained. The Layer 3 design guidelines for having clients and WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 in different subnets does not mean that the WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 master and slaves can also be separated by  
routers—they must still be collocated in the same VLAN (subnet).  
WLAN handsets The WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212/6120/6140  
support both G.711 and G.729 codecs, but only using a 30 ms packetization  
rate.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 translates between packetization  
rates, meaning that from the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the  
handset, the call uses the packetization rate specified by the CS 1000 (for  
example, 20 ms). Nortel recommends that the CS1000 paketization rate  
match the 2245 at 30ms. For BCM, the packetization rate must be 30ms.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 planning 63  
The handsets encapsulate their voice payloads in SVP for QoS. The  
handsets further synchronize communications, so that the handsets are  
able to avoid collisions with each other more effectively than the usual  
802.11 collision avoidance mechanisms. Each handset maintains a list  
of up to four APs as potential candidates for roaming. The handsets are  
aggressive in roaming to other APs, which tends to prevent them from using  
a suboptimal data rate when another AP can provide better service. The  
handsets also communicate with the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
and discover which APs are at full call capacity, so that the handsets can  
direct their calls through an AP that has call capacity available.  
Under optimal conditions, meaning no interference and all devices in  
proximity of the AP, up to 10 voice calls from a handset are supported  
on a single AP 2330. When configuring the maximum call parameter of  
a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, never configure it above 10. A  
more realistic rule of thumb that allows for devices to move about and rate  
scale accordingly is anywhere from six to eight calls per AP. A noisy RF  
environment can impact the numbers further.  
To provide data devices some amount of guaranteed bandwidth, lower the  
maximum voice calls per AP to prevent voice calls from consuming all  
available throughput. For example, limiting the maximum calls per AP to  
seven allows data traffic to reserve up to 30 per cent of media capacity. If  
the network supports other handset calls on the 802.11b network, you must  
leave adequate capacity for those calls too. Note that the call admission  
control function of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 cannot serve to  
limit those other voice calls on a per-AP basis.  
There is an alternative control on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
that affects call capacity across APs. This control allows the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 to fix the data rates that handsets use. The  
options are Automatic and 1 Mb/2 Mb only. When you choose the latter,  
maximum call capacity drops by slightly more than half if G.711 is in use, or  
by slightly more than two-thirds if G.729 is in use. Most of the variability of  
call capacity is removed as rate scaling effects are eliminated. Therefore,  
you can get more predictable call capacity at the expense of maximum  
number of calls under optimum conditions. Note that with this option  
enabled, throughput for 802.11b data devices is severely impacted by even  
one or two voice calls.  
If the automatic option to have higher potential capacity is selected, there  
is a risk of occasionally being oversubscribed under the worst conditions.  
For example, if eight calls is the configured limit on the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245, and if all eight calls are from handsets on the edge of  
coverage, the cell is oversubscribed. If five calls is the configured limit  
and handsets are restricted to 1 Mb/2 Mb, capacity is wasted when most  
handsets are close that could otherwise be used by other data devices.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 Planning  
To gain this type of predictability, engineer the maximum calls per AP based  
on 1 Mb/2 Mb rate selections in the handsets, configure that number as the  
call limit on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, and then configure the  
actual rate of the handsets (on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245) to  
Automatic. That way, the WLAN is engineered for the worst case, but in  
optimal conditions, more throughput is left over for other devices to use,  
because the handsets use higher data rates.  
To summarize, do not use the 1 Mb/2 Mb option, even if the network is  
engineered to that type of coverage.  
Gateway and timing function  
WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 provide both the connection or  
gateway to the Call Server for the wireless handsets, and the timing function  
for active calls. This gateway function is distributed across the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 group.  
The number of active WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 is determined  
dynamically. Whenever a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is added to or  
removed from the system, the distribution of timing function for active calls,  
as well as the gateway function, is affected.  
Roaming and handover  
Roaming is the ability of the wireless handset to go anywhere in the WLAN  
Extended Service Set RF signal coverage area, and to make and receive  
calls. Handover is the ability of the wireless handset to maintain an active  
call without interruption while moving within a WLAN Extended Service Set  
(ESS) RF signal coverage area of a WLAN. This means that the wireless  
handset hands over the WLAN RF signal from AP to AP without interrupting  
the data stream.  
Access points on the same subnet  
The handset can perform handover and roaming across SVP-compliant  
APs that reside on the same subnet as the wireless handset and WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 group.  
Mobility across different subnets when using DHCP  
If a WSS is not in use and the wireless handset IP address is acquired  
through DHCP, the wireless handset must be powered down and powered  
up when entering a new subnet. This enables functionality of the wireless  
handset when entering the WLAN RF signal coverage area of a different  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group on a different subnet. After the  
wireless handset establishes communication within the Extended Service  
Set Identifier (ESSID) of the new WLAN, obtains another IP address from  
the DHCP server, and checks in with the group master, normal functionality  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Placement guidelines for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 65  
returns. If the wireless handset is configured to use ESSID of the new  
WLAN, it automatically discovers the ESSID of the APs operating in  
broadcast mode.  
summarizes the capabilities.  
Table 6  
Roaming and handover capabilities summary  
IP address  
Static  
Roaming capability  
Handover capability  
WSS in use  
No  
No  
No  
Static  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
DHCP  
Yes, if the  
wireless handset  
is power-cycled  
between subnets.  
DHCP  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multicast  
IP multicast addresses are used by the WLAN Handset 2211 and the  
WLAN IP 6120 Handset Push-to-talk (PTT) feature. The use of IP multicast  
addresses requires that multicasting be enabled on the Layer 2 switch  
used by the defined group (WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 master  
and slaves and wireless handsets).  
Routers are typically configured with filters to prevent multicast traffic from  
flowing outside of specific domains. The wireless LAN can be placed on a  
separate VLAN or subnet to reduce the effects of broadcast and multicast  
traffic from devices in other network segments.  
Placement guidelines for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
To reduce the impact that jitter, delay and packet loss has on voice quality,  
proper placement of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is critical. See  
Telephony Manager 2245 provides three critical functions to help achieve  
exceptional voice quality over WLAN:  
Timing  
Quality of Service (QoS)  
Connection Admission Control  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
66 Planning  
Before adding the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the network:  
Ensure that the APs used in the network are Voice Interoperability  
for Enterprise Wireless (VIEW) certified. For more information, go to  
Ensure that the handsets are running Nortel Phase II software (97.070  
or greater).  
Figure 10  
Maximum delay, jitter and packet loss  
Strict timing requirements dictate that the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 must be placed as close as possible to the handsets, ideally in the  
same subnet.  
End-to-end jitter, delay and packet loss budget is a general VoIP best  
practice:  
End-to-end delay is the time it takes for voice to go from the microphone  
of the sending telephone to the earpiece of the receiving telephone.  
End-to-end jitter must not exceed 30 ms north of the SVP server (PBX to  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245) and must not exceed 1 ms south  
of the SVP server (the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the AP).  
End-to-end packet loss is the number of packets that are lost in the  
network.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Placement guidelines for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 67  
To achieve excellent voice quality, Nortel recommends using G711 CODEC  
with the following configuration:  
End-to-end delay < = 150 ms (one way)  
Packet loss < = 0.5%  
The maximum jitter buffer for the handsets set as low as possible.  
For more information, see Converging the Data Network with VoIP  
Fundamentals (NN43001-260).  
The jitter budget for the link south of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 ensures that packets arrive at the handset within the 30 ms arrival  
window. The evenly spaced packet flow on the outbound side of the WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 allows the handset to conserve battery life by  
not using extra battery power to wait for late arriving packets. It also allows  
efficient roaming while the handset moves from one AP coverage area to  
Figure 11  
Jitter removal for packets going to the AP  
The following figures describe end-to-end delay for differing topologies:  
For an example of an end-to-end delay for a LAN, see Figure 12  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 Planning  
For an example of an end-to-end delay for a WAN, see Figure 13  
For an example of an end-to-end delay for a LAN to a Public Switched  
Telephone Network (PSTN), see Figure 14 "Example 3: End-to-end  
Figure 12  
Example 1: End-to-end delay and packet loss for a LAN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Placement guidelines for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 69  
Figure 13  
Example 2: End-to-end delay and packet loss for a WAN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70 Planning  
Figure 14  
Example 3: End-to-end delay and packet loss for a LAN to a PSTN  
Use the following tools to measure jitter, delay and packet loss:  
Ping (to estimate delay and packet loss)  
Netmeeting (to generate RTP traffic)  
Ethernet (to capture and analyze the RTP traffic)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Placement guidelines for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 71  
Figure 15  
Measuring jitter, delay and packet loss  
Procedure 1  
Measuring jitter, delay, and packet loss  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
Connect PC 2 to LAN segment C.  
Obtain the IP address of PC 2.  
Start Netmeeting.  
Connect PC 1 to the LAN on segment B.  
Ping PC 2 and note the length of the round-trip delay.  
Start Ethernet and capture packets on the correct interface.  
Configure a filter for RTP packets.  
Start a Netmeeting session on PC 2.  
End the Netmeeting session and stop the packet capture.  
Save the file and analyze the trace to make sure that the jitter, delay,  
and packet loss are within specifications.  
11  
Move PC 2 to segment A and repeat Step 1 to Step 10.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
72 Planning  
—End—  
For an example of packet stream analysis for jitter and packet loss, see  
Figure 16  
Part 1: Example of analysis of a packet stream captured between segment A and B  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 planning 73  
Figure 17  
Part 2: Example of analysis of a packet stream captured between segment A and B  
Usually the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is placed in the same  
subnet as WLAN handsets. This was previously a rule, but it is now just a  
recommendation. The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 sometimes must  
be placed in a different subnet from the handsets. However, the rules for  
delay, jitter, and packet loss still apply.  
Ethernet connectivity between the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and  
the call server, or other voice endpoint, must never exceed 100 milliseconds  
(ms) of one-way delay, 30 ms of jitter, and 2% packet loss end to end  
regardless of the physical properties of the link. Whether the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 is in the same subnet with handsets, the link  
between the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and the handset must be  
under 100 ms of one-way delay, 1 ms of jitter and under 2% packet loss.  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 planning  
The optional WLAN Application Gateway 2246 requires a 10 Mbs  
half-duplex switched Ethernet connection.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
74 Planning  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 installation requirements  
Locate the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and optional WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 in a space with:  
sufficient backboard mounting space and proximity to the LAN access  
device (switched Ethernet switch), Call Server, and power source  
rack-mount unit (if using)  
easy access to the front panel, which is used for cabling  
for the WLAN Application Telephony Gateway 2246, a maximum  
distance of 325 feet (100 meters) from the Ethernet switch  
for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, a maximum distance of 325  
feet (100 meters) from the Ethernet switch  
IP address planning  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, the optional WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246, and each of the wireless handsets and APs associated  
with them, requires an IP address.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT!  
The master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 must have an IP address  
statically configured.  
If using DHCP for the rest of the network, the DHCP Server must have the static  
IP address of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configured on it. If  
using DNS, the DNS Server must have the static IP address of the master WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 configured on it.  
The wireless handsets can be configured to use DHCP or can be assigned  
a static IP address. If there is no DHCP Server, the system administrator  
must determine what IP addresses are to be used for static addressing.  
As well, whether static IP addressing or DHCP is used, a pool of alias IP  
addresses must be configured on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager for the  
use of the wireless handsets. Ensure that the pool of alias IP addresses is  
reserved exclusively for the use of the wireless handsets.  
For information about configuring a static IP address on a WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245, see "WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
configuration" (page 99). For information about configuring a static IP  
address for a WLAN Application Gateway 2246, see "Configuring the WLAN  
configuring a static IP address on the handsets, see WLAN Handsets  
Fundamentals (NN43001-505). For information about assigning IP  
addresses to the APs, see the vendor-specific documentation.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Planning worksheets 75  
Record the static IP address assignments and store them in a safe place.  
IP addressing with DHCP  
A pool of alias IP addresses must be configured on the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 for the use of the wireless handsets. The use of a 22-bit  
subnet mask provides IP addresses for approximately 500 wireless  
handsets (1024 nodes). Allocate a pool of an equal number of IP addresses  
on the DHCP server for the wireless handsets.  
For example:  
142.223.204.1 to 142.223.205.254 are allocated on the DHCP Server for  
the use of the wireless handsets.  
142.223.206.1 to 142.223.207.254 are configured on the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager for IP aliases for the wireless handsets.  
Ensure that all these IP addresses are reserved on the DHCP Server for the  
use of the wireless handsets and not assigned to any other device.  
Planning worksheets  
Complete this worksheet and the worksheet in Table 8 "Wireless handset  
planning worksheet" (page 76) before beginning the installation.  
Copy and complete this worksheet in Table 7 "WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 planning worksheet" (page 75) for each WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245. Obtain the necessary information from the network administrator.  
Table 7  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 planning worksheet  
Unit number  
IP address  
Hostname  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Master WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245  
TFTP Download Master IP  
address  
Primary DNS Server IP address  
Secondary DNS Server IP  
address  
DNS Domain  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
76 Planning  
WINS Server IP address  
Workgroup name  
Syslog Server IP address  
First alias IP address  
Last alias IP address  
Copy and complete the worksheet from Table 8 "Wireless handset planning  
worksheet" (page 76) to maintain a configuration record for the handsets.  
Table 8  
Wireless handset planning worksheet  
Dialin  
g
Ext.  
IP Address  
(if statically  
configured)  
Line *  
1
MAC Address *  
User Name  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
*—required only if using the optional WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
77  
System information  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Bandwidth management  
The existing CS 1000 Release 5.0 software bandwidth management  
mechanism using bandwidth zones applies to the handsets.  
Zones  
A WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group consists of a master WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245, zero to 15 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
slaves, and their associated wireless handsets.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
78 System information  
It is good practice to create a Bandwidth Management Zone for each WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 group (one group per subnet) in LD 117. Use  
the CHG ZDES command to name the zone with the IP address of the  
master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
=> NEW ZONE <zone number>  
=> CHG ZDES <zone number> <Wnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn>  
where  
W indicates WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the master WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
=> PRT ZDES ALL  
This allows the system administrator or support personnel to print a list of  
the IP addresses of all the master WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 in  
the system simply by printing the Zone designators in LD 117. They are  
printed as Wnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. This enables support personnel to easily  
obtain the IP address of a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 so they can  
telnet to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 in order to diagnose and  
correct problems.  
Zones for wireless handsets  
Assign the virtual line TNs for the wireless handsets (configured in LD 11) to  
the zone number assigned to its home WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
group. Using LD 117, this enables support personnel to list the current  
registration status of all wireless handsets that belong to the zone of a  
specific WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group.  
=> STIP ZONE <zone number>  
All wireless handsets currently registered (checked in) with their home  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group is listed. The format of the list is  
TERMIP = <alias IP address>, which is located in the same subnet  
as the IP address of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 of the  
group. Any wireless handsets that are currently checked in with another  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group are listed with a TERMIP in a  
different subnet from that of their home WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
group ZDES.  
Current registration status of wireless handsets  
To list the current registration status of all wireless handsets that are  
registered in a specific subnet, regardless of their home zone, use either  
of the following LD 117 commands.  
STIP TERMIP <subnet of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
group>  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Codecs 79  
OR  
PRT IPDN <subnet of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group>  
Alias IP address  
Using the DN of a wireless handset, support personnel can obtain the  
current or most recent alias IP address used by a wireless handset when it  
checked in with the master of a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group,  
and subsequently registered with the LTPS and Call Server.  
=> PRT DNIP <DN of wireless handset>  
Wireless telephone type designation  
Unless there is another preferred use for the DES (Designator) prompt in  
LD 11, Nortel recommends using the DES prompt to indicate the type of  
WLAN Handset—either type 2210, 2211, 2212, or 6120—for the i2004  
type of virtual line TN. This allows support personnel to enter 2210, 2211,  
2212 or 6120 at the LD 20 DES prompt and receive a list of handsets that  
are configured on the Call Server.  
Call blocking  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 controls the media stream and  
blocks calls due to bandwidth constraints on any AP without notifying the  
Call Server.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be configured with the  
maximum number of simultaneous calls allowed on a single AP.  
On an incoming call for a wireless handset associated with a full AP, the  
caller hears ringback and the Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) treatment  
is applied, such as forwarding the call to voice mail. The called party is  
not notified of the incoming call.  
If the call originates from a wireless handset that is on a  
bandwidth-restricted AP, the caller hears a warning tone and the call  
is blocked.  
If a wireless handset moves into an area serviced by an AP that is  
already at capacity, the wireless handset does not associate with the  
new AP. Instead, the wireless handset attempts to remain associated  
with an AP that has sufficient bandwidth. This could result in packet  
loss, degraded signal and voice quality, and a call could be dropped.  
UNIStim signaling, such as watchdog updates or lamp audit, are not  
affected by the bandwidth constraint.  
Codecs  
G.711, G.729A, and G.729B codecs are supported. The RTP packets that  
transit between the wireless handsets and the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 always contain 30 ms of voice. The WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
80 System information  
2245 repackages the voice data to the correct packet size. The jitter buffer  
is always configured to 70 ms, and any UNIStim messages that configure  
the jitter buffer are ignored.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT!  
If the wireless handset is registered to the same LTPS as the IP Phones, configure  
only the subset of codecs supported by both the wireless handsets and the IP  
Phones.  
If it is necessary for the IP Phone to use a codec that is not supported on  
the wireless handsets, such as G.723.1, the wireless handsets must be  
configured on their own separate node.  
If a remote endpoint is configured for G.723.1 as the Best Bandwidth  
(BB) Codec and G.711 as the Best Quality (BQ) Codec, (G.729 is not  
configured), the media path negotiates to G.711. The result can be  
unexpected consequences on a narrow-band link.  
Jitter buffer  
The handsets do not support a configurable jitter buffer. If they receive the  
Jitter Buffer Configuration UNIStim message, the command is ignored. The  
jitter buffer is fixed at 70 ms.  
There are two implications of a fixed jitter buffer setting:  
If the system jitter buffer setting is less than 70 ms (default is 50 ms),  
there is a slightly longer delay in the IP Phone receive direction.  
If the system jitter buffer setting is longer than 70 ms to accommodate  
severe network jitter, there could be slightly higher packet loss in the  
IP Phone receive direction.  
The longer than normal jitter buffer setting is reasonable since extra jitter is  
introduced by the RF portion of the link.  
RLR and SLR  
The handsets do not support UNIStim messages used to adjust the Receive  
Loudness Rating (RLR) and Send Loudness Rating (SLR) of the wireless  
handset.  
RTCP  
Handsets do not support Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP).  
Incoming RTCP packets sent to the wireless handsets are actually sent to  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and are discarded. If the wireless  
handset is queried for RTCP parameters, the wireless handset returns  
dummy values of 0 jitter, 0 latency, and 0 packet loss.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Branch Office 81  
Gain adjustment  
The handsets ignore any UNIStim messages that adjust the loss plan of  
the wireless handset.  
Programmable rings and tones  
The wireless handsets support alerting cadences but only a single alerting  
frequency.  
The wireless handsets have the same call progress tone capability as the  
existing IP Phones 2004.  
In/Out of Service tones  
When the handset completes registration with the Call Server, it plays the In  
Service tone. When the handset loses connection with the Call Server and  
resets, it plays the Out of Service tone.  
Virtual Office  
The handsets support Virtual Office. For more information, see Features  
and Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106) and IP Line Fundamentals  
(NN43001-500).  
Branch Office  
The handsets are supported in a branch office location using the Branch  
Office feature. Branch Office refers to the Media Gateway 1000B and the  
Survivable Remote Gateway (SRG). A WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
and supported APs must be installed at the branch office location. Branch  
office wireless handsets do not require wireless handset infrastructure in  
the main office.  
The wireless handsets in a branch office configuration behave like an  
IP Phone 2004 in the Branch Office feature. The wireless handsets are  
administered in the same manner as the IP Phone 2004. The display on  
the wireless handsets is almost the same as the display on the IP Phone  
2004, with one exception—the Local mode display.  
Local mode display  
The default state of the wireless handset is Standby. To determine whether  
the wireless handset is in Local mode, press the off-hook (Green) or the  
MENU keys on the WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 or the soft keys and the  
Nav keys on the WLAN Handset 6120/6140. Pressing these keys changes  
the state of the handset to Active Idle or Active Off-Hook, therefore putting  
the handset in communication with the primary Signaling Server.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
82 System information  
For the MG 1000B, if a wireless handset is registered to the Small System  
Controller (SSC) in Local mode, the local-mode license information  
appears on the wireless handset on the second line of the display. Since  
the maximum number of display characters on the wireless handset is 19  
characters, the local-mode license information about the wireless handset  
Table 9  
IP Phone 2004 and handset Local mode license display (MG 1000B only)  
IP Phone 2004  
Handset  
Licensed days left x  
Licensed days left xx  
Beyond licensed period  
Licensed days lft x  
Licensed ds lft xx  
Beyond licensd prd  
For more information about Branch Office, see Branch Office Installation  
and Commissioning (NN43001-314).  
Survivable Remote Gateway  
The handset can be deployed in a Survivable Remote Gateway (SRG)  
configuration for both SRG 1.0 and SRG50.  
The handset supports Virtual Office in SRG for Normal mode. It is not  
supported in Local mode.  
Test Local mode is not accessible because the Services key is not  
supported in Local mode.  
The navigation keys are supported in Normal mode and not in Local mode.  
Since the default state of the wireless handset is Standby, it is only possible  
to determine if the wireless handset is in Local mode by pressing the  
off-hook (Green) or MENU keys. Pressing these keys changes the state  
of the handset to Active Idle or Active Off-Hook, therefore putting it in  
communication with the primary Signaling Server in the main office.  
Note 1: In order to allow SRG 1.0 systems based on BCM 3.6, to  
correctly operate with the handsets, they must have a software patch  
installed. The patch can be downloaded from the Nortel Electronic  
Software Delivery Web site.  
The BCMSRG 3.6 WLAN IP Telephony Feature patch is called  
BCM_360[1].039__WLAN_IP_Telephony_Patch.exe, which includes 51  
files required for automated patch installation.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NAT 83  
Note 2: No patch is required for SRG 1.0 based on BCM 3.7 or SRG50  
systems  
For more information about SRG, see Main Office Configuration Guide for  
Survivable Remote Gateway 50 (NN43001-307).  
External Applications Server  
The External Applications Server (XAS) applications are not available on  
the handsets.  
End-to-end QoS  
End-to-end QoS, such as DiffServ, and Layer 2 QoS, such as 802.1 Qp, are  
not supported on the wireless telephone system. Any UNIStim commands  
sent to the wireless handsets attempting to adjust Layer 2 or Layer 3 QoS  
parameters are ignored.  
However, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can tag packets with a  
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) tag. For more information, see  
"Quality of Service" (page 177). You can also provide QoS mechanisms  
through the configuration of network equipment.  
The Layer 2 switch port to which the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is  
connected can be configured to add 802.1 Qp tagging. The Layer 3 port  
that acts as the gateway for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be  
configured to add the appropriate DiffServ tagging. Since all of the signaling  
and media traffic passes through the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245,  
all packets are tagged with the appropriate priority. If more than one WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 is used, each Layer 2 port to which a WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 is connected must be configured to add the  
802.1 Qp tagging.  
NAT  
Handsets can be deployed in an Network Address Translation (NAT)  
environment.  
This section describes important considerations that must be taken into  
account when using the handsets in a NAT environment. Failure to comply  
with or heed these considerations can result in wireless handset malfunction.  
For detailed information about NAT and the NAT Traversal feature, see IP  
Line Fundamentals (NN43001-500).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
84 System information  
NAT Traversal feature  
The NAT Traversal feature is used where the IP Phone (this includes the  
handsets) is located on the private side of the NAT router, while the rest of  
the Server resides on the public side.  
To ensure correct deployment of the wireless handsets in this type of  
network configuration, most, if not all, of the WLAN equipment must reside  
on the private side of the NAT router.  
Network configurations  
The WLAN Handset 2212 has a VPN feature that enables an IPsec tunnel  
to a Nortel VPN Router, which is the only IPsec platform supported today.  
This feature alters some of the usual design recommendations for the  
telephony components, such as the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Usually, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is placed in the same  
subnet with the handsets.  
With the VPN feature enabled, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 now  
resides behind the VPN Router in a different subnet from the handsets;  
however, even though the same-subnet restriction has been lifted, it is still  
very important to locate the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 as close to  
the handsets as possible. In this case, it is located immediately behind the  
VPN Router (and in the same subnet as the VPN Router). The VPN Router  
must also be located as close to the handsets as possible.  
You can deploy the handsets behind a NAT router with no Security Switch,  
configuration includes a Layer 2 switch, which can be any Layer 2 switch  
(for example, Nortel Ethernet Switch 450). No Layer 3 device, such as a  
router, can be located between the wireless handsets and the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NAT 85  
Figure 18  
VPN design over a Layer 2 network  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
86 System information  
Figure 19  
VPN design over a Layer 3 network  
ATTENTION  
If the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is not in the same subnet as the  
handsets, the handsets do not work.  
ATTENTION  
(page 89), the clouds can represent a corporate intranet or the public Internet.  
Make the VPN Router public interface the default gateway for the handsets,  
and if not the direct gateway for clients, at least ensure that traffic comes  
from the WLAN into the public interface, not the private interface.  
Connect the private interface of the VPN Router to the trusted side of the  
network. Make sure that client DHCP traffic flows through the VPN Router.  
If a network path around the VPN Router exists for the handsets to get  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NAT 87  
DHCP assignments, the routing requirements on the VPN Router become  
much more complicated. To support such a scenario, you must configure  
static routes on the public interface as well as inject those routes into the  
routing protocol on the private interface. Therefore, Nortel recommends that  
you do not use the network design shown in Figure 20 "Not recommended  
VoWLAN design" (page 87) as a design for the VPN feature.  
Figure 20  
Not recommended VoWLAN design  
If you deploy the VPN feature of the WLAN Handset 2212 in a mixed  
network where WLAN Handsets 2211/2210s are also in use, the design  
recommendation becomes a little more complex. If you place a WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager in the subnet with the WLAN Handsets 2210/2211, and  
place a WLAN IP Telephony Manager in the subnet with the VPN Router  
to support the WLAN Handset 2212, admission control problems for the  
telephony WLAN can occur. Each WLAN IP Telephony Manager counts the  
number of their own devices placing calls over APs, but does not count the  
number of calls controlled by the other WLAN IP Telephony Manager. This  
creates a blind spot for each device, and it is possible to oversubscribe an  
AP by up to 2:1. The best solution to this problem is to have the WLAN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88 System information  
Handsets 2210/2211 handsets use the same WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
as the WLAN Handset 2212 (VPN). This WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
is on the other (remote) side of the VPN Router from the handsets, that  
is, over a routed hop.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 in a NAT environment  
The IP Telephony Manager 2245 must be in constant communication with  
the handsets to ensure handset functionality. Since the IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 must be on the same subnet as the handsets, the IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 must be located on the private side of the NAT  
router. The wireless VoIP network does not function if the IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is located on the public side of the NAT router.  
Port 10000 is used for bidirectional UDP traffic between the handset alias  
IP addresses of the IP Telephony Manager 2245 and the Echo Server on  
the TPS used for NAT detection. Any network security devices that monitor  
network traffic between the IP Telephony Manager 2245 and the Signaling  
Server(s) must be configured to allow traffic using port 10000 to pass freely  
between these devices.  
DHCP Server location in a NAT environment  
The WLAN Handsets only support Full DHCP. The device acting as a  
DHCP Server to the WLAN Handsets must be configurable to send the  
vendor-specific DHCP fields.  
In some cases, the NAT router acts as the DHCP Server. In this case,  
configure the NAT router with the required DHCP parameters and necessary  
information.  
If a separate DHCP Server is used, it must be located on the private side  
Server)" (page 89) for more information.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NAT 89  
Figure 21  
Network configuration 3 with Full DHCP Server  
TFTP Server location in a NAT environment  
The TFTP Server can be located on the public side of the network. In this  
case, the NAT router (and Wireless Security Switch if deployed) can have to  
be configured to allow WLAN Handsets access to the TFTP Server (allow  
traffic through on the required ports). This scenario is represented in Figure  
Another option is to place the TFTP Server on the private side of the  
network.  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 in a NAT environment  
If a WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is to be deployed, the requirements  
are similar to that of the TFTP server.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
90 System information  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 can be located on the public side of  
the network as long as traffic is allowed on the correct ports. This scenario  
Alternatively, the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 can be placed on the  
private side of the network.  
CS 1000 features  
Nearly all CS 1000 features are supported on the wireless telephone system  
and WLAN Handsets 22x1. Partially supported features are listed in Table  
not supported are listed in Table 11 "CS 1000 not supported" (page 90).  
Table 10  
Partially supported CS 1000 features  
Feature  
DIG  
Feature full name  
Dial Intercom Group  
Intercom Hotline  
Description  
Handsfree call option is not supported.  
HOT I  
Voice Intercom Hotline (default) is  
not supported. The Ringing option is  
supported.  
RGA  
Ring Again  
Since the handsets cannot buzz, there is  
no Ring Again tone. The only way to use  
the Ring Again feature is to determine if  
the Ring Again indicator is flashing, which  
is possible only when the wireless handset  
is in the active state.  
Table 11  
CS 1000 not supported  
Feature  
AAB  
Feature full name  
Description  
Automatic Answerback  
Voice Call  
Cannot automatically enable Handsfree.  
Cannot automatically enable Handsfree.  
Not supported.  
VCC  
Active Call Failover  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Phone 2004 features 91  
IP Phone 2004 features  
Table 12 "IP Phone 2004 features" (page 91) provides information about the  
IP Phone 2004 features for the handsets.  
Table 12  
IP Phone 2004 features  
Supported on the WLAN  
handsets  
Feature  
Description  
Keypad  
Yes  
Yes  
Navigation keys  
Up—Volume Up button  
Down—Volume Down button  
Left button—  
Right button—  
6 feature keys  
4 soft-labelled keys  
Display  
Yes  
Yes  
Partially  
IP phone 2004: 5x24 display  
Handsets: 4x19 display  
Message Waiting  
Indicator  
Yes  
Small envelope icon in the top right of the  
handset LCD display  
Branch Office  
Yes  
Yes  
Survivable Remote  
Gateway  
Virtual Office  
Partially  
No Services key.  
Use FCN+7 for the Services key to support  
Virtual Office.  
XAS  
No  
No Expand key.  
Personal Directory  
Callers List  
Yes  
Redial List  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
92 System information  
Supported on the WLAN  
handsets  
Feature  
Description  
Password Admin  
No  
The handsets can be password-protected,  
but this is different from the IP Phone 2004  
password protection mechanism.  
The IP Phone 2004 password protection  
is supported, in addition to the handset  
password protection.  
KEM  
No  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
Installation  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Required materials  
The following equipment must be provided by the customer:  
power outlet(s)—must accept the provided AC adapter, one for the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and one for the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 (if used).  
plywood backboard space—the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
is designed to be wall-mounted to 1/2 in. plywood securely screwed to  
the wall.  
OR  
optional WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 rack-mount kit (must be  
ordered separately), containing mounting plates and screws  
screws—used to mount the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the  
wall. Four #8 - /2 in. pan-head wood screws (or similar devices) are  
required.  
1
10BaseT CAT5 cable with an RJ-45 connector for the optional WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246—provides a connection to the Ethernet  
switch.  
CAT5 cable with an RJ-45 connector for the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245—provides a connection to the Ethernet switch.  
DB-9 female null-modem cable—required for initial configuration of the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and WLAN Application Gateway  
2246.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
94 Installation  
Supplied equipment  
Each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 is shipped with one Class II AC adapter with 24V DC, 1A output.  
Preinstallation checklist  
Ensure that the following requirements are met prior to installation:  
The location chosen for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is adequate and power is available.  
APs are SVP-compatible and coverage is adequate.  
A dedicated line is available for remote modem access, if needed.  
The telephone system administrator is on-site to program the existing  
telephone system.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 installation tasks  
The following are the tasks that must be completed to install the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245:  
or  
About the front panel  
The front panel of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 contains ports  
to connect to the following:  
power  
LAN  
administrative computer through an RS-232 port  
Status LEDs supply information about status and activity of the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245. See Figure 22 "WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 installation tasks 95  
Figure 22  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 front panel  
RS-232 port—the male DB-9 connector (DTE). Provides an RS-232  
connection to a terminal, terminal emulator, or modem for system  
administration.  
Link LEDs  
LNKOK—lit when there is a network connection  
ACT—lit when there is system activity  
COL—lit if there are network collisions  
NETWORK—connects the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the  
wired Ethernet LAN  
ERROR LED—lit when the system has detected an error  
Status LEDs—indicate system error messages and status  
1—heartbeat  
2—active calls  
3, 4, 5—currently unused  
PWR—connects to the AC adapter supplying power to the system  
WARNING  
Use only the provided Class II AC adapter with 24V DC, 1A  
output.  
Wall-mount  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be mounted either vertically or  
horizontally.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
96 Installation  
Procedure 2  
Wall-mounting the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Use a 18-inch drill bit to drill four pilot holes, on 1.84 by 12.1 inch  
centers (approximately equivalent to 1-1316 inch by 12-18 inch).  
Insert the #8 x 34-inch screws in the pilot holes and tighten, leaving  
a 18 to 14-inch gap from the wall.  
Slide the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 over the screws until  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 drops into place in the  
keyhole openings of the flange.  
4
Tighten screws fully.  
—End—  
Rack-mount  
The rack-mount kit is designed for mounting the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 in a standard 19-inch rack and contains the following  
equipment:  
Mounting plates—two for each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to  
be mounted.  
Screws—four rack-mount screws for each WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 to be mounted.  
Manager 2245" (page 96) to rack-mount the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
Procedure 3  
Rack-mounting the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Remove the corner screws from the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
Screw the U-shaped end (round screw holes) of the two mounting  
plates to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Screw the other end of the two mounting plates (oblong screw holes)  
to the rack.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 installation 97  
4
Repeat steps 1-3 for each additional WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245. The mounting plate is designed to provide the correct  
minimum spacing between units. When mounting multiple units,  
stack the units in the rack as closely as possible.  
—End—  
LAN connection  
Use an RJ-45 cable to connect the NETWORK port on the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 to the connecting port on the Ethernet switch.  
Power connection  
connect the power to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Procedure 4  
Connecting the power  
Step Action  
1
Connect the power plug from the AC adapter to the jack labeled  
PWR on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
WARNING  
Use only the provided Class II AC adapter with output  
24V DC, 1A.  
2
3
Plug the AC adapter into a 110V AC outlet to supply power to the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
The system cycles through diagnostic testing and the LEDs blink for  
approximately one minute.  
When the system is ready for use, verify the following:  
a. ERROR LED is off.  
b. Status 1 is blinking.  
—End—  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 installation  
For information about installing the optional WLAN Application Gateway  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
98 Installation  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
configuration  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Introduction  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 acts as a proxy for the wireless  
handsets and provides several services for them. It is connected to the  
same subnet as the wireless handsets. The wireless handsets always  
communicate voice and signaling directly with the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245, using the proprietary SpectraLink Voice Protocol (SVP).  
SVP is required for quality of service (QoS) because the current  
IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN standard provides no mechanism for  
differentiating audio packets from data packets. This standard is undergoing  
revision to version 802.11e to provide functionality in an industry standard  
similar to SVP, therefore ensuring high-quality voice in a mixed-client  
environment.  
Functional description  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 provides the following services  
to the handsets:  
It acts as a proxy for every wireless handset; that is, all UNIStim  
signaling and RTP media to and from the wireless handset pass through  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. Except for the initial DHCP  
and TFTP sessions, the wireless handsets only communicate with the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
100 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
Each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is configured with an IP  
address with which all of the wireless handsets communicate. In  
addition, each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is configured with a  
pool of IP addresses. When a wireless handset registers with a WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245, the wireless handset is assigned one  
of the IP addresses from the pool. All communication between this  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and other devices (TPS, IP Phones,  
gateways, and other wireless handsets) is always done through its pool  
IP address. In this sense, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 acts  
as a NAT (Network Address Translation)  
Note: The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 has a single physical  
Ethernet interface and MAC address; therefore, all of the IP  
addresses are mapped to a single MAC address.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 server tags and untags packets  
with the SVP header. SVP packets have the protocol byte of the IP  
header configured to 0x77. SVP-compliant APs use this proprietary  
tagging to give priority to tagged packets. For UDP (UNIStim and RTP)  
packets going from the wireless handset to the network, the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 replaces the SVP protocol number, 0x77,  
with the UDP number, 0x11. For packets going from the network to the  
wireless handset, the protocol number is changed from 0x11 to 0x77.  
Because the packets that traverse the network between the wireless  
handset and the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 are not standard  
IP packets (the packets use a nonstandard protocol number), there can  
be no Layer 3 routing in the path. Therefore, the wireless handsets and  
WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 must be in the same logical subnet.  
RTP packets between the wireless telephone and the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 always contain 30 ms worth of voice, no  
matter what is configured on the Call Server. The WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 repackages the RTP packets to conform to the size that  
is configured in the Call Server. This provides more efficient use of the  
available Radio Frequency (RF) bandwidth at the expense of slightly  
increased jitter and latency.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is configured with a maximum  
allowable number of simultaneous media streams on a single AP. The  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 keeps track of the number of media  
streams on each AP and blocks calls to and from a wireless handset  
that would exceed the configured capacity. For more information about  
call blocking, see "Call blocking" (page 79).  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 has limitations for high  
availability. There are some types of failure that can result in complete  
outages. Every group of WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s in a single  
subnet has a master node. If this node fails or if connectivity to it is lost,  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connect to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 101  
the entire WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group fails. All active calls  
are lost and no future calls can be placed until the master WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 is replaced (either by installing a spare or by  
reconfiguring one of the slaves to be a master).  
Alternately, if one of the slave WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s fails,  
the group as a whole still functions, although some individual calls  
can be lost due to the reassigning of handsets throughout the group.  
One less WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 also means that the call  
capacity of that node is lost until the failed WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 is replaced.  
A keep-alive packet exchange runs between the wireless handset and  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 every 30 seconds. If the wireless  
handset detects that the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is unreachable,  
the wireless handset resets itself and attempts to reestablish a connection  
with the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Configuration tasks  
The following are the tasks required to configure the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245:  
In the initial configuration of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, the  
IP addresses and the maximum number of active calls per AP must be  
configured. Later, you can use Telnet to configure the IP address of the  
TFTP Server where the software files are located and the hostname.  
Connect to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
The initial connection to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 must be  
made through a serial connection to establish the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 IP address. After the IP address is established, connection  
to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be done through the network  
using Telnet.  
Nortel recommends that you perform the complete initial configuration after  
the serial connection is made.  
Serial port connection  
Telephony Manager 2245 through a serial port.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
102 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
Procedure 5  
Connecting to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 through a serial port  
Step Action  
1
2
Using a DB-9 female, null-modem cable, connect the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 to the serial port of a terminal or PC.  
Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal), or use  
a VT-100 terminal with the following configuration:  
Bits per second: 9600  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: None  
Note: If using Windows 2000, Service Pack 2 must be installed  
to enable the use of HyperTerminal™.  
3
4
Press Enter to display the login screen.  
Enter the default login admin and the default password admin.  
Note: The login name and password are case-sensitive.  
The NetLink SVP-II System screen appears.  
—End—  
Telnet connection  
The Telnet method of connection is used for routine maintenance of the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 for local and remote administration,  
depending on the network.  
Note: Telnet can only be used after the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 IP address is configured.  
Manager 2245 through Telnet" (page 103) to connect to the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 through Telnet.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configure the network 103  
Procedure 6  
Connecting to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 through Telnet  
Step Action  
1
2
Run a Telnet session to the IP address of the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
Enter the login and the password.  
Note: The login name and password are case-sensitive.  
The NetLink SVP-II System menu appears. The following menu  
choices are available:  
System Status—view software code version, error messages,  
and status of operation. See "Viewing software version" (page  
SVP-II Configuration—set the mode and reset the system. See  
Network Configuration—set network configuration options,  
including IP addresses and hostname. See "Configure the  
Change Password—change the password for WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager. See "Change the password" (page 108).  
Exit—exit the menu.  
—End—  
Configure the network  
Select Network Configuration on the NetLink SVP-II System screen  
to configure the IP address and other network settings of the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245. An optional Hostname and the IP address of  
TFTP Server containing the software update files are also configured here.  
Configure the following Network Configuration screen fields with information  
provided by the network administrator:  
IP Address:—enter the complete IP address for the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245, including digits and periods.  
Note: If this WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is the master, it must  
have a static IP address configured. Do not use DHCP to assign the IP  
address of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. Other WLAN  
IP Telephony Managers 2245 in a multiple WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 environment can have their IP address assigned by DHCP.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
104 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
Fore more information about the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
Hostname:—optional field. Change the default hostname of this WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245, if desired. Hostname is for identification  
purposes only.  
Note: Spaces cannot be entered in this field.  
Subnet mask—the subnet mask of the subnet.  
Default Gateway—the default gateway for the subnet.  
SVP-II TFTP Download Master—the IP address of the TFTP Server  
where the software update files are saved. Enter one of the following:  
— NONE—disables this function  
— IP address of the TFTP Server that transfers software updates to the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Primary DNS Server, Secondary DNS Server, DNS Domain—used  
to configure Domain Name Services (DNS). Obtain the settings from  
the network administrator. Optionally, enter DHCP. This enables the  
DHCP client in the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to attempt to  
automatically obtain a valid IP address from the DHCP Server. The  
DHCP setting is only valid when the IP address is obtained from DHCP.  
WINS Server—the IP address of the Windows Name Services (WINS)  
Server. Obtain the settings from the network administrator. Optionally,  
enter DHCP. This enables the DHCP client in the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 to attempt to automatically obtain a valid IP address  
from the DHCP Server. The DHCP setting is only valid when the IP  
address is obtained from DHCP.  
When WINS is configured, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can  
translate hostnames to IP addresses. This means that when using  
Telnet, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can be accessed using  
its hostname rather than its IP address.  
Workgroup—indicates whether a workgroup is configured in the WINS  
Server.  
Syslog Server—the IP address of the server where the system logs for  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 are written. If a Syslog Server is  
configured, a message is sent to the Syslog Server when an alarm is  
generated. Enter one of the following:  
— NONE—disables this function  
— IP address of the Syslog Server  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure the network 105  
Maintenance Lock—indicates whether the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is in Maintenance Lock mode.  
Disable Telnet Service—indicates whether a Telnet session can access  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. The available options are:  
Y—prevents a Telnet session from accessing the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
N—allows a Telnet session to access the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
Send/All—in a system with multiple WLAN IP Telephony Managers  
2245, the SendAll option is provided to speed configuration and  
ensure identical settings. The S=SendAll option enables configuration  
parameters of the selected field to be sent to every WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 on the LAN. SendAll can only be used after the IP  
address is configured on each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
using a serial connection. If identical configuration parameters are to be  
used for all WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245, configure only the IP  
address and custom hostname (if desired) on each WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 using the initial serial connection. Then connect through  
the LAN to this WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and use SendAll to  
transmit identical configuration options of each field for all WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT!  
If Send/All is used on the system, all passwords must be identical. Do not change  
the password at the initial configuration if the SendAll option is used. Use the  
default password and change it globally, if desired, after a LAN connection is  
established for all WLAN IP Telephony 2245 units.  
If independent administration of each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is  
desired, the passwords can be set during initial configuration.  
Save the configuration  
Reset the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 in order to save the  
configuration parameters. Follow the steps in Procedure 7 "Saving the  
configuration" (page 105) to save the configuration.  
Procedure 7  
Saving the configuration  
Step Action  
1
Press Esc on the keyboard.  
If the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is in Maintenance Lock, a  
prompt appears asking if the configuration is to be saved.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
106 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
2
3
Enter Y.  
Alternatively, select the Reset option found in the SVP-II  
Configuration screen. Press Esc. See "Configure the WLAN IP  
—End—  
Changing the master IP address  
To change the IP address of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245,  
change it in the Network Configuration menu and reboot the system.  
The alias IP addresses can now be changed in each of the other WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245 without incurring an error.  
Configure the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is configured on the SVP-II  
Configuration screen where the mode of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 is configured. This screen is also used to lock the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 for maintenance and reset the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 after maintenance.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 automatically locks for maintenance  
if the IP address is changed. When a Maintenance Lock occurs, the WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 must be reset upon exit. All active calls are  
terminated during a reset.  
Access the SVP-II Configuration screen from the NetLink SVP-II System  
menu. Scroll to SVP-II Configuration and press Enter.  
Perform the desired SVP-II configuration.  
Phones per Access Point—enter the number of simultaneous calls  
supported for the AP type. AP specifications are described in Appendix  
802.11 Rate—select Automatic to allow the wireless handset to  
determine its rate (up to 11Mbs). Select 1MB/2MB to limit the  
transmission rate between the wireless handsets and APs.  
SVP-II Master—the IP address of the master of the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 group must be identified. Select one of the following  
identification options:  
— Enter the IP address of the master of the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 in each WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 group.  
Include the periods used in the IP address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configure the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 107  
— Enter DHCP. Ensure that the IP address of the master WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 is configured in the DHCP server and  
configure the other WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 to obtain  
the information from the DHCP server.  
— Enter DNS. Ensure that the IP address of the master WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 is configured in the DNS server and  
configure the other WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 to retrieve  
this information from the DNS server.  
First Alias IP Address and Last Alias IP Address—enter the range  
of IP addresses that this WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 can use  
when acting as a proxy for the wireless handsets.  
ATTENTION  
All alias addresses must be on the same subnet as the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245. The IP addresses cannot be duplicated on other subnets or  
WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245. There is no limit to the number of IP  
addresses that can be assigned, but the capacity of each WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is 500 wireless handsets.  
SVP-II Mode—select NetLink IP.  
Ethernet link—select auto-negotiate unless there is a need to specify  
the link speed.  
System Locked—use this option to take the system down for  
maintenance. The default is N (No). Select Y (Yes) to prevent any new  
calls from starting. Enter N to restore normal operation.  
Maintenance Lock—the system automatically sets this option to Y (Yes)  
after certain maintenance activities that require a reset are performed,  
such as changing the IP address. Maintenance Lock prevents any new  
calls from starting. This option cannot be changed. It is automatically  
set by the system. Reset the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 at exit  
to clear Maintenance Lock.  
Inactivity Timeout—use this option to configure the number of minutes  
that the administrative module can be left unattended before the system  
closes it. This number can be from 1 to 100. If the number is 0, the  
administrative module does not close due to inactivity.  
QoS Configuration—use this option to configure decimal values, from  
0 to 63 (default 4), for all classes of traffic.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
To ensure the system transmits voice packets efficiently and with  
minimal delay, you must configure the decimal value for voice packets  
higher than the value for data packets. The configurable classes are:  
— Administration—used for Telnet, TFTP and other administrative  
traffic. This class can have the lowest priority because it does not  
require voice quality.  
— WT (in call)—traffic requires voice quality. Configure this class with a  
higher priority than WT (standby).  
— WT (standby)—traffic requires voice quality. Configure this class  
with a lower priority than WT (in call).  
— RTP—traffic is audio traffic to IP PBX; it requires voice quality.  
— PBX—traffic is not audio traffic to the PBX; voice quality is not  
required.  
— Inter-SVP2—traffic is the information passing protocol that SVP  
servers use to communicate with each other. This class does not  
require priority.  
Reset—if this option is selected, a prompt appears to reset the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 when you exit the SVP-II Configuration screen.  
Reset all SVP servers—if this option is selected, all WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245 on the subnet are reset.  
ATTENTION  
Resetting the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 terminates any calls in progress.  
Change the password  
Nortel recommends that the default password be changed. Follow the steps  
or existing password.  
Procedure 8  
Changing the password  
Step Action  
1
Select Change Password from the NetLink SVP-II System menu.  
The Change Password screen appears.  
2
Enter the old password, enter the new password, and confirm the  
new password.  
The password parameters are as follows:  
must be more than four characters in length  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Change the password 109  
first character must be a letter  
other characters can be a letter or a number  
dashes, spaces, and punctuation marks are not allowed  
(alphanumeric only)  
3
Select Set Password and press Enter. Alternatively, press the S  
key on the keyboard.  
Record the password and keep it in a safe place.  
—End—  
If you forget the password, use the steps in Procedure 9 "Changing a  
forgotten password" (page 109) to log on to the SVP server.  
Procedure 9  
Changing a forgotten password  
Step Action  
1
2
Connect your terminal to the RS-232 port using a null-modem cable.  
To communicate with the gateway, open a terminal emulation  
program, such as HyperTerminal.  
3
4
Power cycle the SVP server.  
After the log on prompt appears, within 60 seconds, enter the log on:  
maint  
5
At the slnk > prompt, enter the password:  
admin  
A confirmation message appears to inform you that the password is  
changed to admin.  
6
After the slnk > prompt reappears, enter:  
exit  
—End—  
Proceed to configure the wireless handsets. For more information, see  
WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
110 WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
Administration and maintenance  
This section contains information about the following topics:  
Adding a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the system  
When a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is added to the system, the  
change is seamless and does not affect wireless handset calling ability.  
A new WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is detected within two seconds  
of being added to the system (booted, configured, and connected). When  
detected, any wireless handset not on an active call is immediately forced to  
check out and check in again. Any wireless handset in a call immediately  
switches to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 assigned to provide  
its timing function. This switchover is not usually noticeable to the user  
because it is similar to a normal handoff between APs. When the wireless  
handset ends the call, it is forced to check out and check in again.  
Checking in to the Gateway  
When a wireless handset is checking in with the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager that is providing the Gateway function (not necessarily the same  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 that is providing the timing function), the  
wireless handset is assigned its Alias IP address. Subsequently when the  
wireless handset checks in with the LTPS, the wireless handset identifies  
itself with its new Alias IP address to the Call Server. If the wireless handset  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
112 Administration and maintenance  
is checking in again and again, it can indicate a problem on the network,  
such as poor AP coverage for a user who is moving about. This information  
is useful when troubleshooting.  
Replacing a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Failed master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
If the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 fails, no telephone calls can  
be made or received on that subnet. To quickly restore functionality to the  
wireless telephone network, Nortel recommends changing the configuration  
of a slave WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to the configuration of the  
master. Then reset all the other slave WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245.  
When they come back up, the slaves recognize the reconfigured slave as  
the new master.  
Manager 2245" (page 112) to replace the failed WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
Replacing the failed WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
2245" (page 112) to replace the failed WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Procedure 10  
Replacing a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Step Action  
1
Disconnect the power cables and LAN cables from the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
2
3
Remove the failed device from the wall or rack mount.  
Mount the replacement device in the same manner that the failed  
device was mounted.  
4
5
6
Connect the replacement device to the LAN and power supply.  
Configure the replacement WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Download the software to the replacement WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
7
Test the replacement device to ensure that it is installed and  
configured correctly.  
For detailed information about installing and configuring the WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager, see "Installation" (page 93) and "WLAN IP  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
View software version 113  
—End—  
Removing a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 from the system  
When a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is removed from the system,  
wireless handsets using the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 are affected.  
If the removal of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is intentional, lock  
and idle it before removing the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
When a WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is removed from the system,  
the removal is detected within two seconds. Wireless handsets not in calls  
are immediately forced to check out and check in again.  
Wireless handset scenarios  
For wireless handsets on active calls, two possible scenarios can occur:  
If the removed WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 provided the gateway  
function for the wireless handset, the call is lost and the wireless handset  
is forced to check in again.  
If the removed WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 provided the timing  
function for the call, the call switches to another WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 to provide the timing function.  
Note: During the two seconds while the loss of the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is being detected, the audio for the call is lost.  
Changing the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
If the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 loses communication with  
the network, the wireless telephone system fails. All WLAN IP Telephony  
Managers 2245 lock. All calls are lost and no calls can be placed.  
Therefore, if the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 must be  
replaced, ensure the system can be shut down with minimal call interruption.  
Reset all WLAN IP Telephony Managers 2245 after the master is replaced.  
If the IP address of the master WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is  
changed, the new IP address must be reconfigured in all WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245 using that master.  
View software version  
The following sections describe how to view the software version of the  
hardware.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
114 Administration and maintenance  
For the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
To view the software versions for the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245,  
Procedure 11  
Viewing the software version  
Step Action  
1
2
From the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 NetLink SVP-II  
System screen, select System Status and press Enter.  
On the System Status Menu screen, scroll down to Software  
Versions and press Enter.  
The Software Version Numbers screen displays the software version  
for each WLAN system component.  
Ensure that the Functional Code version matches the latest version  
available from Nortel:  
—End—  
For the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
For information about viewing the software versions for the optional WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246, see Appendix A "Software versions" (page 166).  
For a wireless handset  
To display the software versions running on a wireless handset, power on  
the wireless handset and hold down the Power On/Start Call key  
For the WLAN Handset 6120/6140, Firmware Version is also an option  
on the Config menu.  
Software updates  
Nortel provides information about software updates. Download the software  
updates from www.nortel.com.  
After obtaining the software updates from Nortel, transfer them to the TFTP  
Server accessed by the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Software updates 115  
Update software on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
To update the software on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, reset  
it. When the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 starts up, it compares its  
software version to the software version on the TFTP Server. The WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 downloads the software from the TFTP Server  
if the versions are different.  
CAUTION  
Always ensure that only the latest version of software is on the  
TFTP Server and that earlier software versions are deleted,  
moved, or renamed.  
At startup, the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 always uses  
TFTP, if configured in the 2245, to compare its software version  
with the version on the TFTP Server. If the versions are different,  
the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 downloads the software  
version from the TFTP Server, even if it is an older version.  
Lock the system  
Always lock the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 in the SVP-II  
Configuration screen before updating the software. Locking the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 prevents new calls from starting.  
Reset the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 after the update is complete.  
Note: All calls in progress are terminated when the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is reset.  
Update software on the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
For information about updating the software on the optional WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246, see Appendix A "Updating software" (page 168).  
Update software on a wireless handset  
With the WLAN system, you can perform over-the-air transfer of software  
updates from the designated TFTP Server to the wireless handsets.  
The downloader function in the wireless handset checks its software version  
every time the wireless handset is turned on. If there is any difference in  
the software version, the wireless handset immediately begins to download  
the update.  
On a clear 802.11a/b/g channel, the download process takes one minute  
or less to complete.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
116 Administration and maintenance  
If the TFTP Server cannot be reached at the time the wireless handset is  
powered on, resets, or comes back into a WLAN service area, the wireless  
handset tries a few times to contact the TFTP Server, and then gives up and  
uses the existing software.  
If more wireless handsets are requesting TFTP service than the TFTP  
Server has ports available, or if the TFTP Server is unreachable or  
unavailable, the wireless handsets try a few times to reach the TFTP Server,  
and then continues to use the existing software. In other words, it is not  
possible to guarantee that a wireless handset is using the latest software.  
For example, it is not possible to guarantee that all wireless handsets are  
upgraded as a result of an isetResetAll command. To verify that a wireless  
handset is running the intended version of software, use the isetShow  
command to determine the software version.  
From the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card, use the oam> or  
IPL> isetGet command to display a list of all currently registered wireless  
handsets that are running the old firmware version. Use this command on  
all LTPS Signaling Servers or Voice Gateway Media Cards that have IP  
Phones and wireless handsets currently registered:  
oam> isetGet fwvsn==<old 221022112212 firmware version>  
Software update (version 97.070) for the WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212  
To download version 97.070 of the software for the WLAN Handsets  
compatible with new or existing wireless handsets.  
Procedure 12  
Updating software (v97.070) for the WLAN Handsets 2210/ 2211/ 2212  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
5
Go to www.nortel.com.  
Select Find Products > A-Z.  
Select W.  
Scroll to WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212 and select Software.  
Select WLAN – Handsets 2210/2211 Firmware version 97.070.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wireless handset download messages 117  
For more information, see WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
Displays  
When the wireless handset is powered on, it displays a series of messages  
indicating that it is searching for new software, checking the versions, and  
downloading the software. During the download, a progress bar on the  
wireless handset display screen displays the progress of the download.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT!  
While the wireless handset is updating the software, the NO SVC message  
displays, and the wireless handset must not be powered off. For approximately  
10 seconds, the wireless handset cannot be powered off. A warning message  
appears during that time. If the warning message is not displayed, the wireless  
handset can be powered off without damage.  
When the update is complete, the wireless handset displays the extension  
number, and is ready for use.  
Wireless handset download messages  
Normal download messages  
When the wireless handset is powered on, it displays a series of messages  
indicating that it is searching for new software, checking the software  
versions, and downloading. The normal message progression is listed in  
Table 13  
Normal download messages  
Message  
Description  
Checking Code  
Wireless handset is contacting the TFTP Server to determine if the server  
has a newer version of software that must be downloaded.  
Erasing Memory  
Updating Code  
Wireless handset has determined that a download must occur and is  
erasing the current software from memory. This message also displays  
a progress bar. When the progress bar fills the display line, the erase  
operation is complete.  
Wireless handset is downloading new software into memory. This  
message also displays a progress bar. When the progress bar fills the  
display line, the update operation is complete on that file.  
When the update is complete, the wireless handset displays the extension  
number, and is ready for use.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
118 Administration and maintenance  
Download failure or recovery messages  
messages for the wireless handset that indicate a failure or recovery  
situation during the software download process.  
Table 14  
Failure and recovery messages  
Message  
Description  
Server Busy  
Wireless handset is attempting to download from a TFTP Server that is  
busy downloading other handsets and refusing additional downloads. The  
wireless handset automatically retries the download every few seconds.  
TFTP Error (x):yy  
A failure occurred during the TFTP download of one of the files.  
(x) = the file number that was being downloaded.  
yy = an error code describing the particular failure. Possible error codes  
are:  
01 = TFTP Server did not find the requested file.  
02 = Access violation (reported from TFTP Server).  
07 = TFTP Server reported No such user error. Check the TFTP  
Server configuration.  
81 = File put into memory did not CRC. The wireless handset  
attempts to download the file again.  
FF = Timeout error. TFTP Server did not respond within a specified  
period of time.  
Erase Failed  
Waiting  
Download process failed to erase the memory in the wireless handset.  
This operation retries.  
Wireless handset has attempted an operation several times and failed,  
and is now waiting for a period of time before attempting that operation  
again.  
Internal Error OE  
OE = Error while writing the Flash (return wireless handset to Nortel).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
119  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Troubleshooting the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Use the System Status Menu screen to obtain information about system  
alarms and network status.  
For information about how to connect to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 and access the System Status Menu screen from the NetLink SVP-II  
Options on the System Status Menu screen provide a window into the  
real-time operation of the system components. Use this data to evaluate  
system function and to troubleshoot areas that can be experiencing  
problems.  
On the System Status Menu screen, select from the following options:  
Error Status—displays alarm and error message information.  
Network Status—displays information about the Ethernet network to  
which the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is connected.  
Software Versions—lists the software versions for the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
Error Status screen  
The Error Status screen displays any alarms that indicate some system  
malfunction. Some of these alarms are easily remedied. Others require  
a call to Nortel Technical Support.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
120 Troubleshooting  
From the System Status Menu screen, select Error Status. The Error Status  
screen displays active alarms on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
(page 120) lists the alarms and the actions required to eliminate the alarm.  
Table 15  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 active alarms and actions  
Alarm text  
Action  
Maximum payload usage reached  
Maximum telephone usage reached  
Maximum Access Point usage reached  
Maximum call usage reached  
SRP audio delayed  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Reduce usage, clear alarm  
Configure an IP address  
SRP audio lost  
No IP address  
Press C to clear all clearable alarms.  
Network Status screen  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 is connected to the Ethernet  
network (LAN). The information about that connection is provided on the  
Network Status screen. The screen displays information about the Ethernet  
network. This information can help troubleshoot network problems.  
To access the Network Status screen, select Network Status from the  
System Status Menu screen.  
Use the Network Status screen to view the following information:  
Ethernet Address—media access control (MAC) address of the WLAN  
IP Telephony Manager 2245 (hexadecimal).  
System Uptime—the number of days, hours, and minutes since the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 was last reset.  
Net—the type of connection to the Ethernet switch currently utilized.  
Displayed as 10 (10BaseT) or 100 (100BaseT) half-duplex, or full-duplex.  
Max (maximum) calls—number of calls that can be supported by the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 (depends on network speed).  
RX—Ethernet statistics about the received signal during System Uptime.  
bytes—number of bytes received  
packets—number of packets received  
errors—sum of all receive errors (long packet, short packet, CRC,  
overrun, alignment)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 121  
drop—packets dropped due to insufficient memory  
fifo—overrun occurred during reception  
alignment—non-octet-aligned packets (number of bits not divisible  
by 8)  
multicast—packets received with a broadcast or multicast  
destination address  
TX—Ethernet statistics about the transmitted signal during System  
Uptime.  
bytes—number of bytes transmitted  
packets—number of packets transmitted  
errors—sum of all transmit errors (heartbeat, late collision, repeated  
collision, underrun, carrier)  
drop—packets dropped due to insufficient memory  
fifo—underrun occurred during transmission  
carrier—count of carrier losses during transmission  
collisions—packets deferred (delayed) due to collision  
SVP-II Access Points in Use—number of APs in use by wireless  
handsets, either in standby or in a call. Last is current use, Max is the  
maximum number in use at one time.  
SVP-II Access Points in Calls—number of APs with wireless handsets  
in a call.  
SVP-II Telephones in Use—number of wireless handsets in standby  
or in a call.  
SVP-II Telephones in Calls—number of wireless handsets in a call.  
SVP-II SRP Audio  
Delay—SRP audio packets whose transmission is momentarily  
delayed  
Lost—SRP audio packets dropped due to insufficient memory  
resources  
Software Version Numbers screen  
The Software Version Numbers screen provides information about the  
software version currently running on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
122 Troubleshooting  
This information helps to determine if the most recent software version is  
running. This information assists Nortel Technical Support in troubleshooting  
software problems.  
Speed or duplex mismatch  
A duplex mismatch on the WLAN can cause the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 to not operate properly. Double-check WLAN connections  
and interfaces to ensure that they are all configured as full-duplex.  
In rare instances, the message Speed or Duplex mismatch error can occur  
during the bootup sequence of the IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
If this situation occurs, verify all devices connected to the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 are configured correctly and no duplex mismatch  
is found. If all configurations are correct, reboot the IP Telephony Manager  
2245. The error message must be cleared.  
Nortel recommends that you  
do not configure the Ethenet Link, on the SVP-II Configuration screen,  
to auto-negotiate.  
use either 100/full or 10/full, as is appropriate for the network.  
configure the ethernet switch port to match the 2245 Ethernet Link.  
Troubleshooting the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
For information about troubleshooting the optional WLAN Application  
Troubleshooting the handset  
Transmission problems can result from any number of factors originating  
from the wireless LAN. Wireless handsets can exhibit transmission  
problems in several ways. They can cease functioning properly, display  
error messages, or display incorrect data. When using and troubleshooting  
wireless handsets, consider the following problem sources to determine the  
best method of approaching a specific situation.  
Context  
When troubleshooting a problem with a wireless handset, it is important to  
determine the context of when and where the problem occurred. Context  
includes the following:  
Was the wireless handset on an active call?  
Was the wireless handset moving or stationary?  
Was the wireless handset powering on or powering off?  
Was PTT being used?  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting the handset 123  
At what location did the problem occur?  
Record this information and provide it to the system administrator or Nortel  
Technical Support.  
Access Point problems  
Most, but not all, wireless handset audio problems are related to AP range,  
positioning, and capacity. Performing a Site Survey as described in "Site  
survey" (page 41) can isolate the AP causing these types of problems. If the  
wireless handset itself is suspected, conduct a parallel site survey with a  
wireless handset that is known to be functioning properly.  
The following are some situations that can cause wireless handset  
difficulties to occur:  
In range/Out of range—service is disrupted if a user moves outside the  
area covered by the WLAN APs. Service is restored if the user moves  
back within range. If a call drops because a user moves out of range,  
the wireless handset recovers the call if the user moves back into range  
within a few seconds.  
Capacity—in areas of heavy use, the call capacity of a particular AP  
can be filled. If this happens, the user hears three chirps from the  
wireless handset. The user can wait until another user terminates a call,  
or move within range of another AP and try the call again. If a user  
is on a call and moves into an area where capacity is full, the system  
attempts to find another AP. Due to range limitations, this can be the  
same as moving out of range.  
Transmission Obstructions—before system and AP installation, the  
best location for APs for optimum transmission coverage is determined  
when a site survey is performed. However, small pockets of obstruction  
can still be present, or obstructions can be introduced into the facility  
after AP installation. This loss of service can be restored by moving out  
of the obstructed area, or by adding more APs.  
Configuration problems  
Certain problems are associated with improper configuration of either the  
WLAN IP Telephony 2245, the optional WLAN Application Gateway 2246, or  
the wireless handset.  
Configuration problems are generally corrected by changing the  
configuration on the WLAN IP Telephony 2245, the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246, or the wireless handset.  
There can also be incorrect programming of the APs. For compatibility and  
configuration information about the APs in use at the site, see Appendix  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
124 Troubleshooting  
Duplex mismatch  
A duplex mismatch on the WLAN can cause the wireless handsets to not  
operate properly. Double-check WLAN connections and interfaces to ensure  
that they are all configured as full-duplex.  
No ring  
It is possible in certain situations for a voice mail message to be left on a  
wireless handset without the wireless handset ever ringing. This situation  
could occur when a wireless handset is out of range of an AP for even a few  
seconds. If during the time the wireless handset is out of AP range and an  
incoming call is received, the incoming call receives the Call Forward No  
Answer (CFNA) treatment configured for that wireless handset, such as  
forwarding the incoming call to voice mail.  
To prevent this situation from occurring, ensure adequate AP coverage in all  
areas where a wireless handset is used.  
Far-end echo  
Sometimes, when using the G.711 codec, echo might be perceptible at the  
far end, and be more severe when the wireless handset is in an environment  
with extreme background noise and the wireless handset volume is set  
to maximum volume.  
To correct this problem, reduce the volume setting on the wireless handset,  
, the microphone gain or both.  
You can change the microphone gain from the Standby Menu, Noise Mode.  
Alternatively, if you experience this problem, consider using the G.729  
codec.  
Dropped calls  
If calls are dropping, use the Site Survey mode of the wireless handset in  
the area where the problem occurred to determine if there is inadequate AP  
coverage in that area.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dropped calls 125  
Wireless handset status messages  
Wireless handset status messages provide information about the handset  
communication with the AP and Call Server. Table 16 "Wireless handset  
status messages" (page 125) summarizes the status messages, in  
alphabetical order.  
Table 16  
Wireless handset status messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
3 chirps  
Wireless handset is not able to  
communicate with the best AP,  
probably because that AP has  
no bandwidth available.  
None. This is only a warning.  
The call is handed-off to the  
best AP after it becomes  
available.  
Address Mismatch  
Wireless handset software  
download files are incorrect or  
corrupted.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
ASSERT xxx.c  
Line yyy  
(For WLAN Handsets  
2210/2211/2212 only.)  
The handset has detected  
a fault from which it cannot  
recover.  
Record the error information so  
that it can be reported.  
Turn the handset off, and then  
on again.  
If the error persists, try  
registering a different handset  
to this telephone port.  
If the error still persists, contact  
Nortel Technical Support and  
report the error.  
Assoc Failed  
xxxxxxxxxxxx  
x...x = AP MAC address  
Handset association is refused  
by the AP; displays the MAC of  
the failing AP.  
Check the handset and AP  
security settings.  
Ensure that the AP  
is configured per the  
Configuration Note.  
Try another AP.  
Assoc Timeout  
xxxxxxxxxxxx  
x...x = AP MAC address  
Handset did not receive an  
association response from the  
AP; displays the MAC of the  
failing AP.  
Check the handset and AP  
security settings.  
Ensure that the AP  
is configured per the  
Configuration Note.  
Try another AP.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
126 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Auth Failed  
xxxxxxxxxxxx  
x...x = AP MAC address  
Handset authentication is  
refused by the AP; displays the  
MAC of the failing AP.  
Check the handset and AP  
security settings.  
Ensure that the AP  
is configured per the  
Configuration Note.  
Try another AP.  
Auth Timeout  
xxxxxxxxxxxx  
x...x = AP MAC address  
Handset did not receive an  
authentication response from  
the AP; displays the MAC of  
the failing AP.  
Check the handset and AP  
security settings.  
Ensure that the AP  
is configured per the  
Configuration Note.  
Try another AP.  
Bad Code Type xx  
Expected Code Type yy  
xx, yy = software license types  
Handset software does not  
match the current handset  
license selection.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
Bad Config  
Some needed configuration  
parameter has not been set.  
Check all required wireless  
handset configuration  
parameters for valid settings.  
Bad ESSID  
(For WLAN Handsets  
2210/2211/2212 only.)  
The wireless handset is  
configured for static ESSID  
(as opposed to Learn once or  
Learn always) and no ESSID is  
entered.  
Enter an ESSID in the  
configuration settings or  
change to one of the Learn  
modes.  
Bad SSID  
(For WLAN Handsets  
6120/6140 only.)  
The wireless handset is  
configured for static SSID (as  
opposed to Learn once or  
Learn always) and no SSID is  
entered.  
Enter an SSID in the  
configuration settings or  
change to one of the Learn  
modes.  
Bad Local ID  
The value of the Phase 1  
Local ID type entered in the  
handset through the menus  
or the Configuration Cradle is  
improperly configured.  
Enter a valid ID value.  
Bad Local ID Type  
Bad Network IP  
The Phase 1 Local ID type  
entered in the handset through  
the menus or the Configuration  
Cradle is missing or invalid.  
Enter a valid ID type. KEY ID is  
the only valid choice.  
The value of the Remote  
Network IP address entered in  
the handset through the menus  
or the Configuration Cradle is  
missing or invalid.  
Enter a valid remote network IP  
address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 127  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Bad Network Mask  
The value of the network  
Enter a valid network mask.  
mask for the Remote Network  
entered in the handset through  
the menus or the Configuration  
Cradle is missing or invalid.  
Bad Payload Type  
The VPN server is not accepting  
If the VPN Client IP is statically  
some of the parameters passed configured, ensure that the  
to it by the handset. One  
common instance is if two  
handsets try to use the Client  
IP.  
address assigned to the  
handset is unique. If using IKE  
Mode Config, ensure that the  
address entered in the VPN  
Server configuration for the  
handset or user is unique.  
Bad Phintl File  
The handset software  
download files are incorrect or  
corrupted.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
Bad Program File  
Bad Preshared Key  
Bad Tunneled IP  
The handset software  
download files are incorrect or  
corrupted.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
The value of the preshared key  
entered in the handset through  
the menus or Configuration  
Cradle is improperly configured.  
Enter a valid preshared key  
value. For a Contivity VPN  
server, this is the password.  
The value of the VPN Client  
IP address entered in the  
handset through the menus  
or the Configuration Cradle is  
configured for static IP and is  
missing.  
Enter a valid client IP address.  
Bad VPN Server IP  
The VPN Server IP address  
entered in the handset through  
the menus or the Configuration  
Cradle is invalid.  
Enter the IP address of the  
VPN server.  
(battery icon), Low Battery  
message, and beep Battery  
Low  
Low battery  
In call: the battery icon displays  
and a soft beep is heard when  
the user is on the wireless  
handset and the battery charge  
is low. User has 15–30 minutes  
of battery life left.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Battery Low  
The Battery Low message  
indicates that the battery pack  
can be changed while the call  
is still in progress.  
For the WLAN Handsets 2210/  
2211/2212 only, do not press  
Power Off/End Call. Place the  
call on Hold or Park, quickly  
remove the discharged battery  
and replace with a charged  
battery, power on the handset  
and press Power On/Start Call  
to resume the call in progress.  
For the WLAN Handsets 6120/  
6140 only, do not press End.  
Place the call on Hold or Park,  
quickly remove the discharged  
battery and replace with a  
charged battery, power on the  
handset and press Start to  
resume the call in progress.  
Not in call: The battery icon  
displays whenever the battery  
charge is low. The message  
Low Battery and a beep  
indicate a critically low battery  
charge when user is not on the  
wireless handset. The wireless  
handset does not work until the  
battery pack is charged.  
Battery Failure  
Battery Failed  
The battery pack is not  
functioning.  
Replace the battery pack with a  
new or confirmed battery pack.  
Only the approved battery pack  
works.  
Battery pack is damaged or  
incompatible with the handset.  
Replace the battery pack with a  
new or confirmed battery pack.  
Only the approved battery pack  
works.  
Can’t renew DHCP  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = DHCP server IP address  
DHCP server is not responding  
to the initial renewal attempt.  
Configuration problem. Check  
the IP address configuration in  
the DHCP server.  
Charging ...  
The wireless handset is  
charging in the Desktop  
Charger.  
No action needed.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 129  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Charge Complete  
The wireless handset is now  
fully charged.  
No action needed.  
Checking Code  
Wireless handset is contacting  
the TFTP Server to determine  
if it has a newer version  
of software that must be  
downloaded.  
None. This message usually  
only lasts for approximately  
one second. If message  
remains displayed, power off  
and contact Nortel Technical  
Support.  
Checking DHCP IP  
CRC Code Error  
The wireless handset is  
retrieving DHCP information  
from the DHCP server.  
None. This is for information  
only.  
The software that is TFTP  
downloaded has a bad Cyclical  
Redundancy Code (CRC)  
check.  
Try the download again. It is  
possible the software became  
corrupted during download. If  
the error repeats, check that  
the download image on the  
TFTP Server is not corrupted.  
Code Mismatch!  
The software loaded into the  
wireless handset is incorrect for  
this model of telephone.  
Verify that the License  
Management value is correct.  
Replace the software image on  
the TFTP server with software  
that is correct for the handset  
model.  
DCA Timeout  
The handset has detected  
a fault from which it cannot  
recover, possibly due to a  
failure to acquire any network.  
Turn the handset off, and then  
on again. If the error persists,  
contact Nortel Technical  
Support and report the error.  
DHCP Error (1-5)  
DHCP Error 1  
The wireless handset cannot  
locate a DHCP server. It tries  
every 4 seconds until a server  
is located.  
DHCP Error 2  
The wireless handset has not  
received a response from the  
DHCP server to a request for  
an IP address. It retries until a  
DHCP server is found.  
DHCP Error 3  
DHCP Error 4  
The server refuses to lease  
the wireless handset an IP  
address. It keeps trying.  
The DHCP server offered the  
wireless handset a lease that  
is too short. The minimum  
lease time is 10 minutes.  
One hour is the minimum  
recommended lease time. The  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
wireless handset stops trying.  
Reconfigure the DHCP server  
and power-cycle the wireless  
handset.  
DHCP Error 5  
Failure during WEP Key  
rotation process (proprietary  
failure).  
DHCP Lease Exp  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = DHCP Server IP address  
DHCP is not responding to  
renewal attempts. At least one  
renewal succeeded.  
The wireless handset failed to  
renew its DHCP lease, either  
because the DHCP server is  
not running, or because the  
configuration is changed by  
the administrator. The wireless  
handset attempts to negotiate  
a new lease or display one of  
the DHCP errors (1-5).  
DHCP NACK error  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = DHCP Server IP address  
DHCP server explicitly refused  
renewal.  
The DHCP lease currently in  
use by the wireless handset is  
no longer valid, which forces  
the wireless handset to restart.  
This problem resolves itself on  
the restart. If it does not, the  
problem is in the DHCP server.  
DL Not On Sector  
The handset software  
download files are incorrect or  
corrupted.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
DO NOT POWER OFF  
The wireless handset is in a  
critical section of the software  
update.  
None. Do not remove the  
battery or attempt to power off  
the phone while this message  
is displayed. Doing so can  
require the wireless handset  
to be returned to Nortel to be  
recovered.  
Duplicate IP  
The wireless handset has  
detected another device with  
its same IP address.  
If using DHCP, check that  
the DHCP server is properly  
configured to avoid duplicate  
addresses.  
If using Static IP, check that the  
wireless handset is assigned a  
unique address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 131  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Erase Failed  
Download process failed to  
erase the memory in the  
wireless handset.  
Operation retries but can  
eventually report the error int.  
error: 0F.  
Power cycle the wireless  
handset.  
Erasing memory  
The wireless handset has  
determined that a download  
must occur and is erasing the  
current software from memory.  
None. When the progress bar  
fills the display line, the erase  
operation is complete.  
Note: Do not turn the handset  
off during this operation.  
Error!  
[error details]  
(For the WLAN Handset  
6120/6140 only)  
A fatal software error is  
detected. All handset operation  
is halted and any call is lost.  
This message appears during  
the Halt on Error mode. To  
capture the error message,  
reboot the handset and write  
down the information that is on  
the display.  
Files Too Big  
The handset software  
download files are incorrect or  
corrupted.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
Flash Config Error  
Handset internal configuration  
is corrupt.  
Perform the Restore  
Defaults operation from  
the administrator menu and  
reprogram, or reprogram using  
the Configuration Cradle.  
Initializing  
The wireless handset is  
performing a power-on  
initialization.  
None. This is informational  
only.  
Internal Err. # #  
The wireless handset has  
detected a fault from which it  
cannot recover.  
Record the error code so it can  
be reported. Turn the wireless  
handset off, and then on  
again. If the error persists, try  
registering a different wireless  
handset to this telephone port.  
If the error still persists, contact  
Nortel Technical Support and  
report the error.  
OE=Error while writing the  
Flash (return handset to  
factory)  
OF = No functional code  
(contact Nortel Technical  
Support)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Invalid ID Info  
The VPN server did not  
recognize this user.  
Make sure that the local ID  
(KEY ID) entered in the handset  
matches the key ID in the VPN  
server. For a Contivity VPN  
server, the local ID must match  
the username.  
Multiple SVP Svr  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 IP address  
Handset received responses  
from multiple WLAN IP  
Telephony Managers 2245;  
displays the IP address of  
one responding WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
Happens if the handset is  
reconfigured to use a different  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 and then powered-down  
before the previous server  
has had time to determine  
that the handset is no longer  
connected to it. The problem  
usually corrects itself in about  
30 seconds.  
Must upgrade SW!  
Handset software is  
incompatible with the hardware.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
Net Busy xxxxxxxxxxxx  
x...x = AP MAC address  
Handset cannot obtain  
sufficient bandwidth to support  
a call; displays the MAC of the  
failing AP.  
Try call again later.  
No DHCP Server  
Handset is unable to contact  
the DHCP server.  
Check that DHCP is operational  
and connected to the WLAN or  
use Static IP configuration in  
the handset.  
No ESSID  
(For the WLAN Handsets  
2210/2211/ 2212 only.)  
Attempted to run the site survey  
application without an ESSID  
configured.  
Let the handset come  
completely up. Statically  
configure an ESSID in the  
Admin menu.  
No SSID  
(For the WLAN Handsets  
6120/6140 only.)  
Attempted to run the site survey  
application without an SSID  
configured.  
Let the handset come  
completely up. Statically  
configure an SSID in the Admin  
menu.  
No Func Code  
Handset software download  
files are incorrect or corrupt.  
Reconfigured the handset to  
gain access to the WLAN and  
download new code.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 133  
Message  
Description  
Action  
No Host IP (Addr)  
The wireless handset is  
configured for static IP (as  
opposed to use DHCP) and  
no valid host IP address (the  
wireless handset IP address) is  
entered.  
Enter a valid IP address in  
the configuration settings or  
change to use DHCP.  
No IP Address  
No Net Access  
Invalid IP address.  
Check the IP address of  
the wireless handset and  
reconfigure if required.  
Cannot authenticate or  
associate with AP.  
Verify the AP configuration.  
Verify that all the WEP settings  
in the handset match those in  
the APs.  
No Net Found  
This indicates any of the  
following:  
No radio link  
(For the WLAN Handsets  
2210/2211/ 2212 only.)  
Verify that the AP is turned on.  
No ESSID—Autolearn  
not supported (or)  
incorrect ESSID  
Verify the ESSID of the wireless  
LAN and enter or Autolearn it  
again, if required.  
AP does not support  
appropriate data  
ranges  
Check the AP configuration  
against the AP Configuration  
Note.  
Out of Range  
Try getting closer to an AP.  
Check to see if other handsets  
are working within the same  
range of an AP. If so, check the  
ESSID of the handset.  
Incorrect WEP settings  
Verify that all the WEP settings  
in the handset match those in  
the APs.  
Incorrect Security  
settings  
Verify that all the Security  
setting in the AP.  
No Net Found  
This indicates any of the  
following:  
No radio link  
(For the WLAN Handsets  
6120/6140 only.)  
Verify that the AP is turned on.  
No ESSID—Autolearn  
not supported (or)  
incorrect SSID  
Verify the SSID of the wireless  
LAN and enter or Autolearn it  
again, if required.  
AP does not support  
appropriate data  
ranges  
Check the AP configuration  
against the AP Configuration  
Note.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Out of Range  
Try getting closer to an AP.  
Check to see if other handsets  
are working within the same  
range of an AP. If so, check the  
SSID of the handset.  
incorrect WEP settings  
Verify that all the WEP settings  
in the handset match those in  
the APs.  
Incorrect Security  
settings  
Verify that all the Security  
setting in the AP.  
No Net Found  
xxxxxxxxxxxx yy  
x...x = AP MAC address  
yy = AP signal strength  
Handset cannot find a suitable  
AP; displays the MAC address  
and signal strength of the best  
nonsuitable AP found.  
Check the AP and handset  
network settings, such as  
ESSID, (for the WLAN  
Handsets 2210/ 2211/2212),  
SSID (for WLAN Handsets  
6120/6140), Security, Reg.  
domain and Tx power.  
Ensure that the APs  
are configured per the  
Configuration Note.  
Try Site Survey mode to  
determine a more specific  
cause.  
No PBX Response  
No Proposal  
The wireless handset tried to  
send a message to the Call  
Server and failed to get a  
response.  
Verify the Call Server is  
operational and connected to  
the network.  
The handset and the VPN  
server cannot agree on a set of  
configuration parameters.  
Check that the Diffie-Hellman  
group, phase 1 and phase 2  
hashes, and the encryption  
algorithms configured on the  
handset are acceptable to the  
VPN server.  
No Reg Domain  
No SVP IP  
Regulatory Domain not set  
Configure the Regulatory  
Domain of the handset.  
The wireless handset is  
configured for static IP (as  
opposed to use DHCP) and  
no valid WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 address is  
entered.  
Enter a valid WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245 IP  
address in the wireless handset  
configuration setting or change  
to use DHCP.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 135  
Message  
Description  
Action  
No SVP Response  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = SVP Server IP address  
The handset has lost contact  
with the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
This can be caused by bad  
radio reception or a problem  
with the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245. The handset  
keeps trying to fix the problem  
for 20 seconds, and the  
message can clear by itself. If it  
does not, the handset restarts.  
Report this problem to the  
system administrator if it keeps  
happening.  
No SVP Server  
Wireless handset cannot locate  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
IP address configuration of  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 is wrong or missing.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 is not working.  
Check error status screen on  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
No LAN connection at the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245.  
Verify WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 connection to  
LAN.  
No SVP Server  
No DNS Entry  
The handset is unable to  
perform DNS lookup for the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245; server had no entry for  
SVP Server.  
The network administrator must  
verify that a proper IP address  
is entered for the SVP Server  
DHCP option.  
No SVP Server  
No DNS IP  
The handset is unable to  
perform a DNS lookup for the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245; no IP address for DNS  
server.  
The network administrator must  
verify proper DHCP server  
operation.  
No SW Found  
A required software component  
has not been properly identified.  
Check that the handset license  
type has a corresponding entry  
in the slink_cfg.cfg file.  
Check that the pd11ccc.bin  
and pi110003.bin entries  
exist under this type in the  
slnk_cfg.cfg.  
No UNIStim DHCP  
The handset is unable to use  
DHCP to obtain the server  
information it requires to start  
up.  
Verify the DHCP server  
configuration information.  
Verify network connectivity  
between the handset and the  
DHCP server.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
No VPN Server  
The handset cannot find the  
VPN server.  
Check that the value of the VPN  
Server IP address configured  
through the administration  
menu or the Configuration  
Cradle match the address of  
the VPN server.  
Not Installed!  
A required software component  
is missing.  
Check that all required software  
files are on the TFTP Server,  
if over-the-air downloading is  
being used. If the error repeats,  
contact Nortel Technical  
Support.  
Payload Malfmd  
The handset cannot understand  
an encrypted message from  
the VPN Server (or vice-versa).  
This is likely to be a mismatch in  
the security parameters such as  
preshared key, Diffie-Hellman  
group, hash and encryption  
algorithms.  
Check the Diffie-Hellman  
group, the phase 1 and phase  
2 hashes, and encryption  
configuration.  
Press End Call  
The call has ended.  
Press the Power Off/End Call  
key to return to standby mode.  
Restart Command  
The wireless handset received  
a restart command from the  
Call Server.  
None. The wireless handset  
automatically restarts in a few  
seconds.  
RTP Open Failed  
Select License  
The handset is unable to open  
the requested RTP or RTCP  
socket.  
Reboot the handset. If the  
error repeats, contact Nortel  
Technical Support.  
The correct protocol has not  
been selected from the license  
set.  
Using the administrative  
menus, select one license from  
the license set to allow the  
wireless handset to download  
the appropriate software.  
Server Busy  
Wireless handset is attempting  
to download from a TFTP  
Server that is busy downloading  
other devices and refusing  
additional downloads.  
None. The wireless handset  
automatically retries the  
download every few seconds.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 137  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Server Unavailable.  
Restarting...  
(For the WLAN Handset  
6120/6140 only)  
An error caused the handset  
to lose the call. It is trying to  
restart and return to standby  
mode.  
Occurs during Restart on  
Error mode. The handset is  
attempting to register with  
the PBX and resume normal  
operation. Error details may be  
available through the Syslog  
Server and by download with  
the Handset Administration  
Tool.  
SKT Open Failed  
Socket open fail. Occurs when  
the handset tries to connect to  
the call server, but there is no  
response. If resiliency is active,  
the handset keeps trying.  
If the call server is inoperative  
and resiliency is not active, or  
the handset cannot locate a  
backup call server, turn off the  
handset and repair the primary  
call server. Nortel recommends  
that you reconfigure the backup  
call server to be the primary  
call server if the repair is  
more time-consuming than the  
reconfiguration.  
Storing Config  
Handset is storing changes to  
handset configuration.  
None. Informational message  
only. The handset can  
display this briefly following  
a configuration change or  
software download.  
SVP Service Rej.  
The WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 has rejected  
a request from the wireless  
handset.  
The wireless handset restarts  
and attempts to reregister  
with the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245, which usually  
fixes the problem. Report this  
to the administrator if it keeps  
happening.  
System Busy  
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy  
y...y = SVP or GW IP Address  
All call paths are in use; try call  
again in a few minutes.  
Gateway or WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager has  
reached call capacity; displays  
the IP address of the gateway  
SVP Server.  
(with busy tone)  
System Locked (with busy  
tone)  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 is locked.  
Try call again later. System is  
locked for maintenance.  
Gateway is locked.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 Troubleshooting  
Message  
Description  
Action  
TFTP ERROR(x):yy  
A failure occurred during a  
TFTP software download.  
(x) = the file number that was  
being downloaded;  
yy = an error code describing  
the particular failure.  
Error code 01, 02 or 07—check  
the TFTP Server configuration.  
Error code 81—the wireless  
handset attempts to download  
the file again.  
Possible error codes are:  
For other messages, power  
off the wireless handset, and  
then turn it on again to retry the  
download.  
01 = TFTP Server did not  
find the requested file.  
02 = Access violation  
(reported from TFTP  
Server).  
If the error repeats, note it  
and contact Nortel Technical  
Support.  
07 = TFTP Server reported  
No such user error.  
81 = File put into memory  
did not CRC.  
FF = Timeout error. TFTP  
Server did not respond  
within a specified period of  
time.  
Too Many Errors  
The handset continues to reset  
and cannot be recovered.  
Fatal error. Return handset to  
Nortel.  
Unknown  
xx:yy:zz  
A phrase is missing from your  
phintl file.  
Download new software from  
the Nortel site.  
Updating Code  
Wireless handset is  
None. When the progress bar  
fills the display line, the update  
operation is complete on that  
file.  
downloading new software  
into memory. The number  
icons at the bottom of the  
display indicate which file  
number is currently being  
downloaded. This message  
also displays a progress bar.  
When the progress bar fills  
the display line, the update  
operation is complete on that  
file.  
Do not turn off the handset  
during this operation.  
VPN Error: xxxx  
The VPN server returned an  
information message with a  
code of xxx.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 139  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Waiting  
Wireless handset has  
None. The wireless handset is  
waiting for a specified period  
of time before attempting that  
operation again.  
attempted some operation  
several times and failed. It  
is now waiting for a period of  
time before attempting that  
operation again.  
Watchdog Timeout  
Wrong Code Type  
The wireless handset failed to  
hear from the Call Server within  
the watchdog timeout interval.  
Verify the Call Server is  
operational and connected to  
the network.  
The software loaded into the  
handset is incorrect for this  
model of handset.  
Verify that the license type is  
set correctly.  
If the license type is correct,  
replace the software image  
on the TFTP server with the  
software that is correct for the  
handset model.  
Using Call Server overlay commands  
The following sections provide information about Call Server overlay  
commands.  
LD 32 IDU command  
For the handsets, the IDU command outputs the following specific  
information:  
Release code: Rls: 6 (2210), Rls: 7 (2211) or Rls: 8 (2212)  
NT Code: NTTQ4010 (2210), NTTQ5010 (2211) or NTTQ69AA (2212)  
Software Version has different format: <Version>.<Issue>  
FWSW:097.070 (or later)  
The IP address is the alias IP address of the wireless handset that is  
provided by the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245. The MAC address  
is the MAC address of the wireless handset. In other words, the MAC  
address and the IP address are not related.  
In the following example, 61 0 is an IP Phone 2004 and 62 2 is a WLAN  
Handset 2211.  
.idu 61 0  
I2004 TN: 061 0 00 00 V  
TN ID CODE: i2004  
ISET MAC ADR: 00:60:38:76:41:C7  
ISET IP ADR: 192 .168 .010 .100  
LTPS IP ADR: 047 .011 .214 .165  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
140 Troubleshooting  
MANUFACTURER CODE: [NAME]  
MODEL:  
NT CODE: NT2K00GI  
COLOR CODE: 66  
RLS CODE: 0  
SER NUM: 7641C7  
FWSW VERSION: 0602B59  
.idu 62 2  
I2004 TN: 062 0 00 02 V  
TN ID CODE: i2004  
ISET MAC ADR: 00:90:7A:01:7E:47  
ISET IP ADR: 192 .168 .010 .200  
LTPS IP ADR: 047 .011 .214 .165  
MANUFACTURER CODE: [NAME]  
MODEL:  
NT CODE: NTTQ5010  
COLOR CODE: 66  
RLS CODE: 7  
SER NUM: 017E47  
FWSW VERSION: 097.021  
LD 32 STAT command  
The wireless handsets are shown REGISTERED in the standby and active  
modes. In the following example, 61 0 is an IP Phone 2004 and 62 2 is a  
WLAN Handset 2211 in the standby mode.  
.stat 61 0  
IDLE REGISTERED 00  
.stat 62 2  
IDLE REGISTERED 00  
LD 117 Inventory command  
In the inventory report, the wireless handsets have a specific release code  
and NT code, similar to the IDU command output. In the following example,  
61 0 is an IP Phone 2004 and 62 2 is a WLAN Handset 2211.  
=> inv prt sets  
Set inventory:  
17 10 2003 8 17 21, 17 10 2003 8 17 22, 6  
i2004, 61 00, i2004 NT2K00GI 66 0 7641C7, I2004 , 6000  
i2004, 62 02, i2004 NTTQ5010 66 7 017E47, I2211 , 6502  
LD 117 STIP command  
The STIP command can be used for wireless handsets; however, the  
wireless handset alias IP address appears as the TERMIP in the command  
output, instead of physical IP address. In the following example, the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 141  
192.168.10.200 is an alias IP address assigned by the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245.  
TN HWID STATUS HOSTIP TERMIP PORT  
______ _______________________________ ______  
__________ ____________ _______  
0x600a 00000000000003000907a017e476607 REG  
47.11.214.165 192.168.10.200 0x1450  
CAPS  
_________  
0x00000000  
--------------------------------  
codec bdwth(k) codecCaps desc  
--------------------------------  
4 190 0x00000000 1  
3 190 0x00000000 1  
17 47 0x00000001 1  
value = 537232412 = 0x2005841C  
Note: For information about more CLI commands, see "Zones" (page  
TPS CLI commands  
The following sections describe TPS command line interface (CLI)  
commands.  
dsetShow command  
In the dsetShow command output, the handsets have a specific Hardware  
ID. The alias IP address is output, not the physical wireless handset IP  
address.  
In the following example, the IP Phone 2004 has an IP address of  
192.168.10.100 and the WLAN Handset 2211 has an alias IP address of  
192.168.10.200. The syntax of the Hardware ID is as follows:  
first two digits—Manufacturer Location. Manufacturer Location is 18 for  
the IP Phone 2004 and 30 for the WLAN Handset 2211.  
next six digits—Manufacturer Code. The Manufacturer Codes are  
defined as follows:  
— IP Phone 2004 Phase 1—006038  
— IP Phone 2004 Phase 2—000ae4  
— WLAN Handset 2210—00907a  
— WLAN Handset 2211—00907a  
— WLAN Handset 2212—00907a  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
142 Troubleshooting  
last two digits—Release Code. The Release Codes are defined as  
follows:  
— IP Phone 2004 Phase 1—0  
— IP Phone 2004 Phase 2—2  
— WLAN Handset 2210—0x06  
— WLAN Handset 2211—0x07  
— WLAN Handset 2212—0x08  
-> dsetShow  
TN IP Address Hardware ID TermType  
---- --------------- ------------------ ----------  
6004 192.168.10.100 180060387641c76600 i2004  
600A 192.168.10.200 3000907a017e476607 i2004  
value = 0 = 0x0  
e2dsetShow command  
The e2dsetShow command is used for the handsets in the same manner  
as for the IP Phones.  
isetCount and isetGet  
Use the alias IP address of the handsets in the expression string of the  
isetCount and isetGet commands, not the physical IP address. The  
following is an example of the isetGet output for the WLAN Handset 2211.  
->isetGet "IP == 192.168.10.200"  
IP Address Type RegType State Up Time Set-TN Regd-TN  
HWID FWVsn  
---------- ----- ------- ----- ------- ------- -----  
------------ ---------  
192.168.10.200 i2004 Regular online 0 00:12:00 062-02  
062-02 3000907a017e476607 097.021  
UNIStimVsn SrcPort DstPort  
--------- ------ ------  
2.6 5100 5000  
isetReset and isetResetAll  
The isetReset command can be used to reset the wireless handsets by  
specifying the wireless handset alias IP, not the physical IP address:  
-> isetReset "192.168.10.200"  
value = 0 = 0x0  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dropped calls 143  
isetShow, isetShowByTN, and isetShowByIP  
Similar to the dsetShow command, the wireless handset outputs its specific  
hardware ID (see dsetShow) and alias IP, not the physical IP address. The  
FW version has a different format <Version>.<Issue> in this output.  
In the following example, the telephone with TN 062-02 is the WLAN  
Handset 2211.  
-> isetShow  
Set Information  
---------------  
IP Address Type RegType State Up Time Set-TN Regd-TN  
---------- ---- ----- ---- ----- ----- -------  
192.168.10.100 i2004 Regular online 4 22:59:22 061-00  
061-00  
HWID FWVsn UNIStimVsn SrcPort DstPort  
------------------ ---- -------- ----- -----  
180060387641c76600 0602B59 2.8 5100 5000  
IP Address Type RegType State Up Time Set-TN Regd-TN  
---------- ---- ----- ---- ----- ----- -------  
192.168.10.200 i2004 Regular online 0 02:03:22 062-02  
062-02  
HWID FWVsn UNIStimVsn SrcPort DstPort  
----------------- ----- ------- ----- ------  
3000907a017e476607 097.021 2.6 5100 5000  
umsKernalJobsShow and umsUpgradeAll  
The umsKernalJobsShow and umsUpgradeAll commands cannot be used  
to monitor and originate software upgrades for wireless handsets since the  
wireless handsets are upgraded using a different mechanism without the  
help of the UMS subsystem. For information about how to monitor and  
originate the software upgrade, see the documentation for the TFTP server  
used by the wireless handsets.  
umsPolicyShow and umsUpdatePolicy  
The IP Phone 2004 policy used in these commands is not applicable to  
handsets, even though they are configured as IP Phones 2004 in the IP Line  
software. The wireless handsets are upgraded using a different mechanism  
without the help of the UMS subsystem.  
usiLibTrace  
The usiLibTrace utility can be used to monitor UNIStim messages from  
the wireless handsets by entering the alias IP address, not the wireless  
handset physical IP address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144 Troubleshooting  
-> usiLibTraceOn "192.168.10.200", 255, 255  
value = 0 = 0x0  
Determining alias IP addresses  
When diagnosing network problems, (for example, to ping the wireless  
handset), it is useful to know the mapping between the alias IP addresses  
as displayed by various Call Server commands and the physical IP address  
of the wireless handset. There is no single command that provides this  
information; however, the administrator can determine it in two ways:  
1. If the wireless handset IP address is statically configured, the  
administrator can look at the IP address of the wireless handset using  
the Admin menu, which is available when the wireless handset is  
powered on.  
2. After the wireless handset is operating and in standby mode, the  
administrator can look at the User Preferences menu to find the alias IP  
address of the wireless handset.  
For more information, see WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
Troubleshooting coverage issues  
Coverage issues are best resolved by adding and relocating APs as  
required. Overlap issues can be resolved by reassigning channels to  
the APs or by relocating the APs. For more information, see Appendix  
Before calling Nortel Technical Support  
To facilitate the handling of the call, obtain the following information and  
have it available when placing a call to Nortel Technical Support:  
software versions on the wireless infrastructure, such as the APs  
pre-installation site survey, including typical network information and  
the wireless site survey information from the site survey tool such as  
the Nortel Site Survey Tool  
paper-based layout of AP placement  
a more refined site survey of the area having issues using the wireless  
handset in Site Survey mode  
list of the PBX and LTPS software versions, including a list of patches  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 and handset firmware versions  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 configuration menu screen captures  
any error messages displayed in the Error Status screen of the System  
Status Menu of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Before calling Nortel Technical Support 145  
any error messages displayed on the handset display screen  
content of the Syslog Server (if using)  
log of the DHCP Server (if available), if using DHCP  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146 Troubleshooting  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
Appendix A  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
This appendix contains information about the following topics:  
Introduction  
With the optional WLAN Application Gateway 2246, third-party applications  
can communicate directly with a maximum of 10,000 handsets. With the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246, users can retrieve and respond to  
information using their wireless handsets.  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is available in several scaled capacity  
levels. The base unit NTTQ65AB enables 64 wireless handsets.  
Table 17  
Model numbers with maximum number of users  
Maximum  
Model number  
NTTQ65AB  
number of users  
64  
128  
NTTQ65BA  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
148 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Maximum  
Model number  
NTTQ65CA  
NTTQ65DA  
NTTQ65EA  
NTTQ65FA  
number of users  
256  
512  
1024  
10000  
a WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is connected to the site LAN through  
an Ethernet switch. The connection to the Application Server can be  
accomplished by a direct connection (RS-232) or through the Ethernet  
connection. Only one of these connections can be used at one time.  
The IP address of the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 must be configured  
during initial configuration. After the IP address is established, the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 can be accessed by the Application Server  
through the RS-232 port or through the LAN using Telnet.  
Figure 23  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 connections  
System overview  
At a typical site, the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is connected to the  
Ethernet switch through an RJ-45CAT 5 cable. The Application Server is  
connected through the RS-232 port. The client’s system can include a  
LAN and its Application Server with a TAP connection to a communications  
device such as a paging controller.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction 149  
Figure 24  
Ethernet switch connections  
Front panel  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 models have similar front panel  
The NTTQ65xx is available in scaled increments to support up to 10 000  
users.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
150 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Figure 25  
NTTQ65xx  
Network Link LEDs  
(L)NKOK—lit when there is a network connection, (for example,  
LINK OK).  
(A)CT—lit if there is system activity.  
(C)OL—lit if there are network collisions.  
(E)RROR—lit when the system has detected an error.  
Status LEDs—indicate system messages and status. See Figure 25  
1—heartbeat, indicates the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is  
running  
2, 3, and 4—currently unused  
5—System master  
Third-party applications  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 enables third-party software  
applications to communicate with the wireless telephones. Users can  
receive and retrieve important information from external systems. Some  
examples of applications in various markets are as follows:  
Health care:  
access patient pharmaceutical records  
receive text messages from nurse call systems  
receive e-mail from remote test labs  
Retail:  
look up merchandise prices  
access inventory  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation 151  
Manufacturing:  
relay alarms to handsets from malfunctioning equipment  
enable managers to monitor production output  
Call Centers:  
review queue statistics  
receive alarms when metrics exceed thresholds  
Nurse-call systems  
In the health care market, the following nurse-call system manufacturers  
have applications known to be compatible with the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246:  
Dukane Corporation  
Emergin WirelessOffice  
Globestar  
Indyme Corporation  
Jeron Nurse Call  
OnSite Communications  
Rauland Nurse Call  
SoloTraxx  
Wescom Nurse Call  
Installation  
Installing with a new system  
If this is a new system installation, complete Procedure 13 "Installing the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246" (page 152) when the rest of the system  
is tested.  
Installing in an existing system  
If the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is being added to an existing  
system, the entire system must be reset before the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 can be used.  
2246" (page 152) to install the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
152 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Procedure 13  
Installing the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Step Action  
1
2
Place the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 on a shelf or convenient  
location.  
Note: The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is physically  
connected to the Ethernet switch and can be placed in any  
convenient location within 325 ft (100 m) of the switch. It can  
also be rack-mounted.  
Connect the power plug from the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
power adapter to the power jack on the front (or rear) of the box.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT  
Use only the power adapter provided by Nortel.  
3
4
5
Plug the power adapter into an outlet or outlet strip.  
Apply power to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Ensure that the ERROR LED is off and LED 1 is blinking.  
—End—  
Configuring the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 IP address  
You must connect to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 through a serial  
connection to configure the IP address and the network parameters. After  
this is done, you can perform administration and further configuration  
through a Telnet connection using the Administration Console.  
to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Procedure 14  
Connecting to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 through a serial port  
Step Action  
1
2
Using a DB-9 female, null-modem cable, connect the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 to the serial port of a terminal or PC.  
Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) or use a  
VT-100 terminal with the following configuration:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuration 153  
Bits per second: 9600  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: None  
Note: If using Windows 2000, Service Pack 2 must be installed  
to enable the use of HyperTerminal™.  
3
4
Reset the system.  
The following appears on the terminal display:  
04830130  
Type the following command using the terminal or PC keyboard:  
0255CC [CTRL M] [CTRL J]  
The command does not display on the screen as it is typed.  
The Login prompt appears. If an error is made when entering the  
command string, the message Ill Formed Packet appears. It  
appears as a series of numbers followed by some form of the typed  
command. If this occurs, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.  
5
Enter the default logon name and the default password:admin  
admin  
admin  
admin  
Note: The logon name and password are case-sensitive.  
The NetLink OAI System screen appears. This screen, the  
main menu screen of the Administration Console, displays the  
factory-default name of the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 to  
which the serial port is connected  
—End—  
Next, configure the WLAN Application Gateway (including IP address) by  
following the steps in the "Task summary list" (page 154).  
Configuration  
The NetLink OAI System screen is the main menu of the Administration  
Console. Use this screen to configure the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
154 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Administration console navigation  
(page 154) to move around the Administration console screens.  
Table 18  
Administration console navigation  
To perform this function  
Press  
Select function from menu  
Arrow keys to highlight the selection. Press  
Enter.  
Display menu associated with highlighted field  
Exit screen  
Enter. The Enter key displays the options  
associated with an item or allows an entry to  
be typed into the field.  
Esc. Press the Esc key to return to the previous  
screen.  
Move one line up  
Move one line down  
Move one field to the left  
Move one field to the right  
Scroll  
Corresponding arrow key.  
If a screen has more lines of information than  
can be displayed at once, the text is wrapped.  
The scroll feature uses the arrow keys. Press  
the down arrow key at the last line to move the  
cursor to the top line. Press the up arrow key at  
the top line to move the cursor to the last line.  
Note: The top line of each screen of the Administration Console displays  
the hostname and IP address of the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Task summary list  
Complete the following tasks to configure the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Select the OAI Box Configuration option to configure the system  
Select the Network Configuration option to configure the Network  
Select the Telephone Line Configuration option to configure the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuration 155  
4
Select the Feature Programming option to configure the function  
sequence that activates the application. See "Programming a  
—End—  
Configuring the OAI Box  
Box Configuration option" (page 155) to configure the system type.  
Procedure 15  
Configure the system type from the OAI Box Configuration option  
Step Action  
1
2
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select OAI Box  
Configuration.  
Note: This option does not appear unless Use NetLink GW with  
mogX00 is configured to Yes, which is the default.  
Enter the configuration information for the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 (provided by the network administrator).  
Use NetLink GW with mogX00—change this option to No.  
TFTP Download Master—enter the IP address of the TFTP  
Server.  
Maintenance Lock—the system sets this option to Yes after  
maintenance activities are performed that require a reset. This  
option cannot be changed. It is automatically set. Reset the  
system at exit to clear Maintenance Lock. Maintenance Lock  
prevents any new calls from starting.  
Reset System—if this option is set to Yes, the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 is reset after pressing ENTER.  
Reset All Systems—not applicable.  
3
Press Esc on the keyboard to return to the NetLink OAI System  
screen.  
—End—  
Configuring network parameters  
configure network parameters, including IP address.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
156 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Procedure 16  
Configuring the network  
Step Action  
1
2
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Network  
Configuration.  
Enter the configuration information for the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246, as provided by the network administrator.  
Ethernet Address—this is the MAC address of the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246. This address is set at the factory.  
IP Address—enter the complete IP address for the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246, including digits and periods. Do  
not use DHCP. The IP address can be changed after initial  
configuration.  
Hostname—the default host name can be changed. This is  
the name of the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 to which  
connection is made. This name is for identification purposes  
only. Spaces cannot be entered in this field.  
Subnet Mask—Enter the subnet mask defined by the network  
administrator.  
Default Router—DHCP or static IP address.  
Allow Telnet Connections—Enter Y (Yes) to allow connection  
to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 through Telnet. Enter  
N (No) if no Telnet connection is allowed.  
Allow FTP ConnectionsYes or No (NTTQ65xx models only).  
DNS server and DNS domain—these settings are used to  
configure Domain Name Services (DNS). (These settings can  
also be configured as DHCP. This causes the DHCP client in the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 to attempt to automatically  
obtain the correct configuration from the DHCP server. The  
DHCP setting is only valid when the IP address is also acquired  
using DHCP).  
WINS servers—these settings are used for Windows Internet  
Name Services (WINS). (These settings can also be configured  
as DHCP. This causes the DHCP client in the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 to attempt to automatically obtain the correct  
setting from the DHCP server. The DHCP setting is only valid  
when the IP address is also acquired using DHCP.) When WINS  
is configured properly, the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 can  
translate hostnames to IP addresses. When using Telnet, it is  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration 157  
also possible to access the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
using its hostname instead of the IP address.  
Logging—can be configured to Syslog or NONE.  
Log server—enter the IP address or hostname of the Syslog  
Server on the network if Syslog is configured. The WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 writes Syslog format diagnostic  
messages to the Syslog Server.  
SNTP server—can be configured as a hostname, IP address,  
or NONE. The SNTP server is a Simple Network Time server.  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 obtains the current date  
and time from the SNTP server and tags syslog messages with  
the date.  
IGMP Enabled—configure as Yes or No. IGMP is Internet Group  
Routing Protocol. IGMP Enabled allows the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 to join multicast groups. Enable this option if the  
network switch connected to the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 requires IGMP for multicast traffic to be forwarded.  
Maintenance Lock—the system sets this option to Yes after  
maintenance activities are performed that require a reset. This  
option cannot be changed. It is automatically set. Reset the  
system at exit to clear Maintenance Lock. Maintenance Lock  
prevents any new calls from starting.  
Press ESC to return to the NetLink OAI System screen.  
Reset the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
—End—  
Connecting to the LAN  
Gateway 2246 to the LAN" (page 157) to connect the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 to the LAN.  
Procedure 17  
Connecting the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 to the LAN  
Step Action  
1
2
Using an RJ-45 cable, connect the NETWORK port of the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 to the connecting port on the Ethernet  
switch.  
Power up the entire system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
158 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
—End—  
All components cycle through their usual diagnostic routine.  
Connecting to the Application Server  
Some applications can require a LAN connection between the Application  
Server and the WLAN Application Gateway 2246. If the applications do  
not require a LAN connection, use the RS-232 port connection. In some  
situations, a modem is connected to be used for remote administration of  
the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Connect to the Application Server through an RS-232 port  
Some applications or systems can require an RS-232 connection between  
the Application Server and the WLAN Application Gateway 2246. If the  
applications have the ability to communicate messages over TCP/IP, and  
do not require a serial connection, the RS-232 cabling is not required. In  
that case, the LAN connection (port 5456) through the Ethernet switch can  
be used for the applications.  
Connect the Application Server to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
serial port by using a cable that conforms to RS-232 standards for  
DTE-to-DTE connections (null modem cable).  
Figure 26  
RS-232 cable connection  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration 159  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 uses the following pins on the  
connector.  
Table 19  
Pins on the connector  
Pin  
1
Function  
Carrier Detect  
Data OAI Receives  
Data OAI Transmits  
Ground  
2
3
5
7
Ready to Send  
Clear to Send  
8
Connect to the Application Server through the LAN  
The IP address must be configured for the WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
to function on the LAN. Follow the application instructions to identify the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 to the application.  
Figure 27  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 connection to Application Server through the LAN  
Connect to Application Server through a modem  
Connect the modem to the Gateway serial port using a cable that conforms  
to RS-232 standards for DTE-to-DCE connections. See Figure 28 "WLAN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
Figure 28  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 connection to Application Server through a modem  
Continuing configuration through Telnet  
After the IP address for the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is configured,  
the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 reset and connected to the LAN  
and the Application Server, Telnet can be used to continue the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 configuration.  
Connecting through Telnet  
Connection to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 can be done through  
the network using Telnet. Telnet can only be used after the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 IP address is configured.  
The Telnet method of connection is used for routine maintenance of the  
system for both local and remote administration, depending on the network.  
Gateway 2246 through Telnet" (page 160) to connect to a WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 through Telnet.  
Procedure 18  
Connecting to a WLAN Application Gateway 2246 through Telnet  
Step Action  
1
2
Run a Telnet session to the IP address of the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246.  
Log in to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
The NetLink OAI System screen appears.  
Note: Because the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is initially  
configured, the NetLink OAI System screen now has some  
different options displayed.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Continuing configuration through Telnet 161  
When the configuration procedure is complete, the NetLink OAI System  
screen adds a Feature Programming option. Also, the OAI Line  
Configuration option is replaced by a Telephone Line Configuration option.  
Configuring the Telephone Line  
Each handset that uses the application features must be configured with  
its line number and MAC address. The name and extension number of the  
handset user can be entered. Obtain this information from the handset  
The handsets require special configuration. This can include configuring  
options on the DHCP server or on the handset to allow it to communicate  
with the WLAN Application Gateway 2246. Be sure these setting are correct.  
For more information, see WLAN Handsets Fundamentals (NN43001-505).  
The system does not allow the same handset to register to two different  
lines. Press Esc to cancel any unwanted transaction.  
to configure the telephone lines for the application.  
Procedure 19  
Configuring a telephone line  
Step Action  
1
2
3
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Telephone Line  
Configuration and press Enter.  
At the Telephone Line Configuration screen, use the arrow keys to  
navigate to the Name and Extension fields.  
Enter the associated data for the wireless handsets.  
MAC Address—the MAC address is printed on the sticker  
underneath the battery on the handset. It can also be displayed  
on the handset by turning off the wireless handset, and then  
pressing and holding the Power On/Start Call button. The MAC  
address appears on the first line of the wireless handset display  
(12 characters). The MAC address must be manually entered by  
typing the entire address, including digits and colons.  
Name—enter the user name assigned to the wireless handset.  
This is for record keeping only; it does not communicate the  
name to the Call Server or the handset.  
Extension—enter the extension number assigned to the  
handset. This is for record keeping only; it does not communicate  
the extension number to the Call Server or the handset.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
162 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
4
5
6
Write the MAC address on the Wireless Handset Planning  
Repeat step 4, step 5, and step 6 for each wireless handset to be  
added or changed.  
Press Esc to return to the NetLink OAI System screen.  
—End—  
Deleting a handset  
Follow the steps in Procedure 20 "Deleting a handset" (page 162) to delete  
a WLAN IP Telephony Manager.  
Procedure 20  
Deleting a handset  
Step Action  
1
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Telephone Line  
Configuration and press Enter.  
The Telephone Line Configuration screen displays.  
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line to be deleted.  
Press D to delete the handset information.  
Press Y to accept changes.  
2
3
4
5
Press Esc to return to the NetLink OAI System screen.  
—End—  
Searching for a handset  
While in the Telephone Line Configuration or the Telephone Line Status  
screens, a search hot key is available.  
search for a handset.  
Procedure 21  
Searching for a handset  
Step Action  
1
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Telephone Line  
Configuration and press Enter.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Continuing configuration through Telnet 163  
2
At the Telephone Line Configuration screen, select the field to use  
as the search key (MAC Address, Name, or Extension),  
3
4
5
Press S to display a search screen dialog box.  
Type an appropriate search string.  
Press Enter.  
The success or failure of the search appears at the bottom of the  
screen.  
6
Continue to change the search string for different search criteria  
or exit by pressing the Esc key.  
—End—  
The first line of the Telephone Line Configuration or Telephone Line Status  
screen displays the line in which the search match is found.  
Successful searches always have the first found match at the top of the list.  
Note: Partial strings match the beginning of strings. For example, a  
search for extension 10 matches extensions 10, 100, 1000, and so on,  
but does not match 010.  
Feature programming  
The application function is accessed in the handset by pressing the FCN  
button plus a second button. The button used to access the application  
feature from the wireless handset is configured through the Feature  
Programming option.  
Note: FCN 1-6 are hard-coded. If the application function is  
programmed to use FCN 1-6, the hard-coded function is overridden.  
Nortel recommends using 7, 8, or 9 for the application function.  
program an application feature for the wireless handsets.  
Procedure 22  
Programming a feature  
Step Action  
1
2
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Feature  
Programming and press Enter.  
At the Feature Programming screen , use the arrow keys to select  
the function number 7, 8, or 9 to associate with the application.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
164 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
3
Type any label up to six characters.  
The label you type here appears on the handset telephone display  
screen next to the assigned number on the FCN menu.  
—End—  
Setting or changing a password  
You can configure a unique password for the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246. The password restricts access to administrative functions of the  
device.  
WARNING  
Record the password and store it in a safe place. If the password  
is lost or forgotten, contact Nortel Technical Support.  
164) to configure or change a password on the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246.  
Procedure 23  
Setting or changing a password  
Step Action  
1
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select Change Password  
and press Enter.  
The Change Password screen displays.  
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates an item that is not applicable.  
2
3
Enter the default password:  
admin  
Follow the prompts to configure a new password.  
—End—  
System status  
the status of the system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System status 165  
Procedure 24  
Viewing system status  
Step Action  
1
2
From the NetLink OAI System screen, select the System Status  
Menu option.  
At the Systems Status Menu screen, select from the following  
options:  
Application ActiveYes appears if the application is  
communicating correctly with the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246. No appears if the application is not connected. This field  
is read-only and changes dynamically.  
Error Status—The only application-specific error is No ECP  
heartbeat, which means the application failed to send a  
heartbeat to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
Network Status—information about the connection to the LAN.  
Software Versions—lists the software versions currently  
running on the WLAN Application Gateway 2246. See "Software  
* Telephone Line Status—provides information about the  
functioning of each wireless handset registered to the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246. See "Telephone line status" (page  
—End—  
Network status  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is connected to the Ethernet network,  
referred to as the LAN. The information about this connection displayed on  
the Network Status screen.  
The following information appears at the top of the screen:  
Ethernet Address—MAC address of the WLAN Application Gateway  
2246 (hexadecimal).  
Stats Time Period—the length of time the statistics are accumulating  
in the Pkts and Bytes columns. This is either the system uptime, or  
the time that has elapsed since a user pressed C=Clear while viewing  
this display.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
166 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
User Time Period—the length of time (in seconds) that statistics  
accumulate in the Userpkts column before resetting to zero. When  
troubleshooting a problem, use this setting to isolate statistics for a given  
time period (for example, one hour). This is the only field in this screen  
that can be changed by the user.  
The rest of the display is a table of Ethernet statistics. The Pkts and User  
Pkts columns list the count of Ethernet packets received or transmitted.  
The Bytes column is the count of bytes received or transmitted during the  
amount of time indicated by the Stats Time Period.  
RX—number of packets and bytes received addressed to the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246.  
RX Broadcast—the number of broadcast packets and bytes received.  
RX Multicast—the number of packets and bytes received with the  
multicast address. (A multicast message is sent to more than one  
destination on the network.)  
RX Not For Us—the number of multicast packets and bytes received  
that were not for the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
TX—the total number of packets and bytes transmitted.  
Interrupts—the number of times the Ethernet controller signals the  
microprocessor that it has received or sent a packet.  
Collisions—the number of times the Ethernet controller attempts to  
send a packet, but another device on the network transmitted at the  
same time, corrupting the transmission.  
Collision Drops—the number of packets the Ethernet controller  
discards, because there were over sixteen collisions. After sixteen  
collisions, the Ethernet controller hardware discards the current packet  
and attempts to send the next packet in its buffer.  
CRC Errors—the number of packets discarded by the Ethernet  
controller, because of a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error.  
Viewing the network status  
From the System Status Menu screen, select Network Status.  
The Network Status screen displays information about the Ethernet network.  
This information can help troubleshoot network problems.  
Software versions  
Each WLAN Application Gateway 2246 and handset runs software that  
is controlled and maintained through versioning. The Software Versions  
screen provides information about the version currently running on the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certification testing 167  
components. This information helps determine if the most recent version of  
software is running, and assists Nortel Technical Support in troubleshooting  
software problems.  
Viewing software versions  
From the System Status Menu screen, select Software Versions.  
Telephone line status  
The Telephone Line Status screen displays which wireless handsets are  
communicating with the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
The following information appears on the Telephone Line Status screen:  
WT MAC—the MAC address of the handset that is entered when the  
wireless handset is configured.  
NameExtension—these fields contain the data entered at configuration.  
PhoneNo ChkIn indicates the handset is not using the application  
function. ChkIn indicates the handset is communicating with the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246.  
Viewing telephone line status  
From the System Status Menu screen, select Telephone Line Status.  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 displays up to 16 telephone lines at  
one time. Move to the next group of 16 lines by using the arrow keys.  
Certification testing  
The following sections provide information about certification testing.  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 certification  
After the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 is properly connected to the  
Application Server, LED 1 blinks.  
Wireless handset certification  
The procedure for certification of wireless handsets is different depending  
on whether you are installing the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 on a  
new system or an existing system.  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 installation on new system  
If this is a new system installation, continue with handset registration  
and Call Server programming. When the wireless handset installation is  
complete, perform the usual voice and coverage tests.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
168 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 installation on existing system  
existing system" (page 168) to certify the wireless handsets on an existing  
system.  
Procedure 25  
Certifying wireless handsets on an existing system  
Step Action  
1
2
Place a test call.  
Test the features on each handset to ensure the system is working  
properly.  
3
4
Test the application on each handset.  
Consult the application provider for specific test procedures.  
—End—  
Software  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 and the handset use proprietary  
software programs. The software versions that are running on the system  
components can be displayed through the System Status screen.  
Nortel provides information about software updates, and how to obtain the  
software (for example, downloading from the Nortel Web site).  
Software updates  
After obtaining the software updates from Nortel, they must be transferred to  
the appropriate location in the LAN. This enables the corresponding system  
components to access and update their software. The FTP (File Transfer  
Protocol) method of transfer is used.  
In the WLAN Application Gateway 2246, the flash file system has the  
following files:  
Table 20  
Software files  
File name  
config.bin  
fnctla.bin  
Description  
OAI box configuration  
functional code  
oaiptlst.bin  
oaipttlsb.bin  
phone list configuration  
redundant phone list configuration  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Software 169  
Nortel periodically upgrades the fnctla.bin file, which is the only file  
downloaded. The other files are configuration files and their names are  
provided for information and backup purposes.  
Obtain software using FTP  
When using FTP, a host system is used to connect to a remote system. In  
this example, the host is the client and the server is the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246. The put command means to copy the files from the host  
to the remote system.  
Note: FTP commands vary with the particular FTP program used. Use  
the following steps as a general guide but be aware that an FTP program  
can use different terms to describe the procedure.  
(page 169) to transfer the software using FTP.  
Procedure 26  
Transferring the software using FTP  
Step Action  
1
2
Navigate to the OAI Box Configuration screen and place the system  
in Maintenance Lock before proceeding with the FTP procedure.  
Note: This prevents new calls from starting. No calls can be in  
progress during the FTP procedure.  
Connect to the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 using the  
command:  
FTP <hostname>  
OR  
FTP <IP address>.  
3
Log on using the default administrator logon and password:  
admin  
admin  
4
5
At the FTP prompt, type binary.  
At the FTP prompt, rename and transfer the functional code file to  
the client server or WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
put mog700.bin fnctla.bin  
where  
MOG700.bin is the downloaded file.  
fnctla.bin is the new name of the file.  
6
After the file transfer is complete, use the Quit command to quit FTP.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
7
Navigate to the NetLink OAI System screen for the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246  
8
9
Select System Status.  
Select Software Versions to verify that software versions for the  
WLAN Application Gateway 2246 are correct.  
10  
Reset the system through the OAI Box Configuration screen in  
order to restore Maintenance Lock to N.  
—End—  
Note: You can use a GUI FTP client instead of the described command  
line FTP procedure.  
TFTP software updates Systems  
The WLAN Application Gateway 2246 uses proprietary software programs.  
You can display the software versions running on the system components  
through the WLAN Application Gateway 2246 System Status screen.  
Nortel provides information about software updates and how to obtain the  
software (for example, downloading from the Nortel Web site).  
load software updates.  
Procedure 27  
Loading software updates  
Step Action  
1
2
Install a TFTP Server on a LAN-connected system.  
Consult the server vendor’s documentation for information about  
TFTP.  
3
4
After obtaining the software update from Nortel, load the software in  
a location that is accessible by the TFTP program.  
To configure the host and start the download, from the NetLink OAI  
System screen, select the TFTP Server Download Configuration  
option.  
5
6
Enter the TFTP Server hostname.  
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Begin TFTP Download  
option.  
7
Press Enter to begin the download.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Planning Worksheet for Handsets 171  
The code downloads into the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
—End—  
Planning Worksheet for Handsets  
Copy and complete the worksheet in Table 21 "Handset Planning  
Worksheet" (page 171) to track parameters for each handset.  
Table 21  
Handset Planning Worksheet  
OAI  
Dialing  
Ext.  
Port  
1
MAC Address  
User Name  
IP Address (if static)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
172 Appendix A WLAN Application Gateway 2246  
OAI  
Port  
Dialing  
Ext.  
MAC Address  
User Name  
IP Address (if static)  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
Free the serial port for administrative purposes  
If the serial port is being used as the primary communication link with the  
Application Server, you must enter the OAI command to free the serial port  
to allow it to be used for administrative purposes, such as changing the IP  
address of the WLAN Application Gateway 2246.  
To free the serial port to allow it to be used for administrative purposes,  
After configuring the WLAN Application Gateway 2246, perform the  
following steps to again use the serial port as the communication link with  
the Application Server.  
Procedure 28  
Using the serial port as the Application Server communication link  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Disconnect the terminal or PC from the serial port on the WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246.  
Reconnect the communication cable between the WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246 and the Application Server.  
Reset the system.  
—End—  
Normal communication between the Application Server and WLAN  
Application Gateway 2246 commences.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
173  
Appendix B  
Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony  
installations  
This appendix contains information required for troubleshooting and  
diagnosing of a WLAN IP Telephony installation, including the following  
topics:  
Site data-gathering tables  
The following are examples of site data-gathering tables.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
174 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Figure 29  
System Information table  
Figure 30  
System History table  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Site data-gathering tables 175  
Figure 31  
Customer Environment table  
Figure 32  
Attachments: IP Sniffer Trace Captures table  
ATTENTION  
Take the wired traces at the mirrored port, to which the 2245 connects, on the  
Data Switch.  
Take the Wireless traces at the Access Points (AP), which are associated with the  
Wireless Telephony Sets (WTS), on the channels that are used.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Figure 33  
Attachments: Other Required table  
Product-specific configuration  
The following sections provide product-specific configuration information.  
Terminal proxy server  
Ensure that the system meets the following requirements:  
CS1000 Release 3.0: include the patches identified in the current  
product bulletin  
2210, 2211: firmware version 97.070  
2245: load 174.027  
CS1000 Release 4.0: include the patches identified in the current  
product bulletin  
2210, 2211, 2212: firmware version 97.070  
2245: load 174.027  
CS1000 Release 4.5: include the patches identified in the current  
product bulletin  
2210, 2211, 2212: firmware version 97.070  
2245: load 174.027  
BCM 3.6: requires cumulative patch #3  
2210, 2211: firmware version 97.070  
BCM 3.7  
2210, 2211: firmware version 97.070  
BCM 4.0  
2210, 2211, 2212: firmware version 97.070  
CS2100: requires software version CICMXPM SE09  
Handset firmware version - 97.070  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WLAN specific configuration 177  
Handsets  
For the WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212, configure the license code to 010  
to download the Nortel UNIStim firmware.  
For the WLAN Handsets 6120/6140, configure the Telephony Protocol to  
032.  
For firmware and documentation, go to www130.nortelnetworks.com.  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
If you have multiple WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245s, you must split  
the alias IP address range to allocate a range to each 2245. Failure to do  
so causes nonfunctioning handsets because one or more 2245s cannot  
allocate alias IP addresses. Without alias IP addresses, the handsets are  
unable to register with the terminal proxy server (TPS).  
Quality of Service  
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) Tag is a Quality of Service  
(QoS) mechanism for setting relative priorities. Packets are tagged with a  
DSCP field in the IP header for type of service. Configure the value as a  
number from 0 to 255; the value can be different for each traffic class listed  
on the screen. Administrative traffic can have the lowest priority because it  
does not require voice quality.  
DSCP tags determine packet priorities for QoS. Nortel recommends the  
following settings:  
WT (In call)—46 (default 4)  
WT (Standby)—40 (default 0)  
RTP—46 (default 4)  
PBX—40 (default 0)  
Inter-SVP2—0 (default)  
Other networks may use different settings—adjust as needed to match  
the network.  
ATTENTION  
IMPORTANT  
You must configure the command mls qos trust dscp on every on every Cisco  
switch port, on which a 2245 is installed; otherwise, the DSCP tagging configured  
on the SVP servers is ignored.  
WLAN specific configuration  
The following sections provide configuration information for various  
switches. In this document, WLAN Security Switch means Nortel WLAN  
Security Switch.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
178 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Nortel switches  
This section contains configuration information for Nortel switches.  
Nortel WLAN Security Switch  
The 2350, 2360, and 2380 model switches have the following requirements:  
load 4.1.14  
configure radio-profile voice dtim-interval 3  
configure radio-profile voice active-scan disable (prevents the AP from  
going off-channel to scan)  
radio-profile voice WMM enabled  
Cisco access points and switches  
This section contains configuration information for selected Cisco access  
points and switches.  
Cisco Aironet 1200 Series  
Ensure that the software is 12.3.7(JA3). This requirement is current as of  
November 2006 and is subject to change.  
Configure the following settings:  
dtim-interval 3  
protocol 119 enabled  
less than 10 ms voice latency  
voice WMM enabled  
For more information, see the Cisco Aironet 1200 Series User Guide.  
Nortel WLAN Security Switch 2270 and the Cisco 4400 Series  
WLAN Controller  
Alpha The 2270 and 4400 infrastructure has the following requirements:  
Turn off aggressive load balancing.  
Disable MAC filtering authentication for voice SSID and use only static  
WEP (40 or 104 bit) encryption.  
Configure 802.11b radio data rates as follows:  
— 1Mb/s—Mandatory  
— 2Mb/s—Mandatory  
— 5.5Mb/s—Supported  
— 11Mb/s—Supported  
Uncheck enable short preamble.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
WLAN specific configuration 179  
Enable Multicast Support on the WLAN Security Switch 2270 to enable  
use of the PTT feature for Nortel Handsets.  
With the following settings, you can use Multicast for some of the regular  
SVP server and PBX control traffic:  
Switch > General: Ethernet Multicast Support = Enabled: (2.2)  
Switch > General, Ports: click ports 1 edit on right hand side of the  
screen and configure Multicast Appliance Mode = Enabled.  
Turn off Rogue AP Detection.  
Turn off AutoRF unless you are running software from Cisco version  
4.0.206.0 or later. If you are running version 4.0.206.0 or later, configure  
the following additional parameters for AutoRF:  
Parameter  
Importance  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Setting  
3600  
Noise Measurement  
Load Measurement  
Signal Measurement  
Coverage Measurement  
3600  
3600  
3600  
Verify that Idle timer is configured to 300 seconds.  
Verify that the AP session timeout is at least 1800 seconds.  
Nortel recommends that you configure the AP session timeout to 65534  
seconds.  
Verify the following setting:  
2230 AP DTIM = 3  
If there are multiple WLAN Security Switch 2270s installed, which are  
intended to participate in a single RF mobility group, the following  
criteria must be met:  
— The RF mobility group name must be same on all 2270s that belong  
to the RF mobility group.  
The mobility group name is case sensitive.  
— Configure the virtual IP address for virtual interface to a nonroutable  
address (for example, a fictitious address such as 1.1.1.1). The  
virtual IP address must be same on all 2270s that belong to the  
RF mobility group.  
— Manually add each switch to the list of RF mobility group members  
for each switch.  
This is not a dynamic configuration.  
For example, you have three switches: A, B, and C.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
You must add B and C as members under mobility group  
configuration for switch A.  
You must add A and C as members under mobility group  
configuration for switch B.  
You must add A and B as members under mobility group  
configuration for switch C.  
The above recommendation is true in the case of VoDATA as well.  
WLAN Security Switch 2270 notes  
The following list contains important information about the WLAN Security  
Switch 2270 and pre-3.2.116.21 code.  
In the 2.0.x code for the WLAN Security Switch 2270, multicast packets  
are directly handled by the CPU. Nortel Handsets use multicast packets  
only when the Push-to-talk (PTT) feature is used. Because the CPU  
handles all multicast packets (control+data) with the 2.0.c code, there  
can be problems with voice quality for PTT conversations, as well as  
for regular calls.  
The multicast issues are resolved in the 2.2.x code. With the 2.2.x code,  
to ease the CPU processing load, multicast packets are off-loaded to  
another hardware chip within the 2270.  
In the 2.0.x code, if GOLD QoS is enabled for voice SSID, APs can  
fail to run RRM sampling while packets are processed in the GOLD  
queue. Therefore, the AutoRFR calculations on the WLAN Security  
Switch 2270 are further delayed. You must watch out for AutoRF issues  
in such scenario. If it is a pure voice implementation, you can assign  
SILVER QoS to voice SSID. This is only a best-effort recommendation.  
If the voice traffic drops as a result, move back to GOLD QoS for voice.  
The PTT feature does not work in 2.0 code if the WLAN Security Switch  
2270 is configured in L2-LWAPP mode. This issue is resolved in the  
2.2.x code.  
There is a client-handoff feature in the advanced options in the  
command line interface (CLI) for release 3.0.107.0.  
For more information, go to www.cisco.com.  
To configure the client handoff to occur after a selected number  
of 802.11 data packet excessive retries, use the config advanced  
client-handoff command:  
config advanced client-handoff <num_of_retries>  
Default: 0 excessive retries (disabled)  
The command to configure the client handoff to 100 excessive retries is:  
config advanced client-handoff 100  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WLAN specific configuration 181  
ATTENTION  
2.x code is not supported. Nortel recommends that sites upgrade to 3.2.116.21  
code. Contact Nortel GNTS Technical support to obtain this code—do not  
download it from the Cisco Web site.  
Specific Cisco configuration examples  
181) provides the steps to configure the Cisco Aironet 1230 connected  
with a Cisco Catalyst 2950, and the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
connected with the Cisco Catalyst 2950.  
Table 22  
1230 connected with 2950 and 2245 connected with 2950  
AP: 1230  
2950 connected the APs  
2950 connected to 2245  
1
class-map match-all  
class_SVP_VoIP  
mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16  
40 32 46 48 56  
mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16 40  
32 46 48 56  
match ip protocol 119  
(protocol 119 marked  
the value of cos 5)  
2
Policy-map  
wireless-SVP-VoIP  
class class_SVP_VoIP  
wrr-queue bandwidth 25 25 50  
0
wrr-queue bandwidth 25 25 50 0  
wrr-queue cos-map 1 0 1 2 4  
wrr-queue cos-map 3 3 6 7  
wrr-queue cos-map 4 5  
(dscp 40 and 47 by default are  
marked as cos 5)  
wrr-queue cos-map 1 0 1 2 4  
wrr-queue cos-map 3 3 6 7  
wrr-queue cos-map 4 5  
(dscp 40 and 47 by default are  
marked as cos 5)  
3
int fastethernet 0.240  
encapsulation dot1Q  
240 service-policy input  
wireless- SVP-VoIP  
int fastethernet 026 (the port  
that is connected with the AP)  
switchport trunk native vlan 11  
switchport trunk allowed vlan  
11, 240  
int fastethernet 03 (the port that  
connected with 2245)  
switchport access vlan xx  
switchport mode access  
mls qos trust cos  
switchport mode trunk  
mls qos trust cos  
mls qos cos 5  
service-policy input  
trust-voice-2245  
4
5
(for return path) dot11  
priority-map avvid  
class-map match-all voice-sig  
match access-group 100  
access-list 100 permit udp  
172.23.0.016 eq 5000  
172.23.0.016  
6
class-map match-all  
voice-bearer match  
access-group 101  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
182 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
AP: 1230  
2950 connected the APs  
2950 connected to 2245  
7
8
access-list 101 permit udp  
172.23.0.016 eq 5200  
172.23.0.016  
policy-map trust -voice-2245  
class voice-sig  
set ip dscp 40  
class voice-bearer  
set ip dscp 46  
182) provides the steps to configure the Cisco Aironet 1230 connected to  
the Cisco Catalyst 3560, and the Cisco Catalyst 6509 connected to the  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245.  
Table 23  
1230 connected with 3560 and 2245 connected with 6509  
AP:1230  
3650 connected to APs  
6509 connected to 2245  
1
class-map match-all  
class_SVP_VoIP  
mls qos  
mls qos  
match ip protocol 119  
(protocol 119 marked  
the value of cos 5)  
2
3
Policy-map  
wireless-SVP-VoIP  
class class_SVP_VoIP  
mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16  
40 34 46 48 56  
mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16  
40 32 46 48 56  
int fastethernet  
0.240 encapsulation  
dot1Q 240  
interface fastethernet 01  
priority-queue out mls qos trust  
cos  
class-map match-all voice-sig  
match access-group 100  
service-policy input  
wireless-SVPVoIP  
4
5
6
(for return path) dot11  
priority-map avvid  
access-list 100 permit udp  
172.23.0.016 eq 5000  
172.23.0.016  
class-map match-all  
voice-bearer match  
access-group 101  
access-list 101 permit udp  
172.23.0.016 eq 5200  
172.23.0.016  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General WLAN configuration 183  
AP:1230  
3650 connected to APs  
6509 connected to 2245  
7
8
policy-map trust -voice-2245  
class voice-sig  
set ip dscp 40  
class voice-bearer  
set ip dscp 46  
int fastethernet 03 (the port that  
is connected with 2245)  
switchport access vlan xx  
switchport mode access  
mls qos trust cos  
mls qos cos 5  
service-policy input  
trust-voice-2245  
General WLAN configuration  
The following is a list of considerations for general WLAN configuration:  
Multicast must be configured in any WLAN for Push-to-talk (PTT) on  
the WLAN Handset 2211.  
APs use channels 1, 6, and 11.  
APs require a 15-20dB separation for like channels to avoid cochannel  
interference.  
A one-way Performance domain is required (handset to call server):  
Max 100 ms delay, Max 30 ms jitter, and Max 2% packet loss.  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 to AP link is (ideally) limited to  
100 ms delay, 1 ms jitter and under 2% packet loss.  
The signal Strength must be -70dB or greater to provide sufficient voice  
quality and proper operation. Note that -60dB or better is required for  
11 MB data rate.  
Wireless bridges are not permitted because they contribute to bottleneck  
delays.  
The transmission power must be the same on all APs and match the  
power setting on the handsets.  
AP bandwidth usage must be limited to 65 to 80% maximum for handset  
usage.  
The protocols used are: TCP, UDP, DHCP, DNS, WINS, TFTP, FTP,  
ARP, ICMP, and Telnet.  
The PTT feature uses the multicast IP address of 224.0.1.116 and is  
generally isolated to a single subnet.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
184 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
DHCP server options  
The DHCP server options known to work in almost every situation are 3, 7,  
42, 66, 128, 151, and 152:  
DHCP Option 3—the Default Gateway  
DHCP Option 7—the Syslog Server  
DHCP Option 42—the Time Server  
DHCP Option 60—the Class Identifier  
DHCP Option 66—the IP address of the TFTP Server  
DHCP Option 151—the IP address of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245  
DHCP Option 152—the IP address for the optional WLAN Application  
Gateway 2246  
DHCP options have the same format as the BOOTP vendor extensions.  
Options can be fixed length or variable length. All options begin with a tag  
byte, which uniquely identifies the option. Fixed length options without data  
consist of only a tag byte. The value of the length byte does not include the  
tag and length fields.  
Options containing NVT ASCII data (ideally) do not include a trailing NULL;  
however, the receiver of such options must be prepared to delete trailing  
NULLs if they exist. The receiver must not require that a trailing NULL be  
included in the data. With some variable-length options, the length field is a  
constant but it still must be specified.  
DHCP options  
This section provides the IEEE definitions of the DHCP options. The term  
SHOULD, as used in this section, is to be interpreted as described in  
[RFC2119].  
DHCP option 1: Subnet Mask. Length: 6 bytes  
This option specifies the client’s subnet mask. If both the Subnet Mask and the router option are  
specified in a DHCP reply, this option MUST be first.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DHCP options 185  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
Mask  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 1.  
Length. 8 bits. Always set to 4.  
Mask. 32 bits. Subnet mask of the client.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options.  
Updated by: RFC 3942.  
DHCP option 3: Length: 6+ bytes This option specifies a list of 32 bit IP addresses for routers on  
the client’s subnet. The routers SHOULD be listed in order of preference.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
IP address  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 3.  
Length. 8 bits. 4+ in multiples of 4.  
IP address. 32 bits. One or more IPv4 addresses.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options.  
Updated by: RFC 3942.  
DHCP option 6: 6+ bytes This option specifies a list of DNS servers available to the client. The  
servers SHOULD be listed in order of preference.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
IP address  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 6.  
Length. 8 bits. 4+ in multiples of 4.  
IP address. 32 bits. One or more IPv4 addresses.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options.  
DHCP option 7: 6+ bytes This option specifies a list of MIT-LCS UDP servers available to the  
client. The servers SHOULD be listed in order of preference.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
IP address  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 7.  
Length. 8 bits. 4+ in multiples of 4.  
IP address. 32 bits. One or more IPv4 addresses.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options.  
Updated by: RFC 3942.  
DHCP option 15: 3+ bytes This option specifies the domain name that client should use when  
resolving hostnames via DNS.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
Domain name  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 15.  
Length. 8 bits. 1+.  
Domain name. Variable length.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options  
DHCP option 42: Length 4+bytes This option specifies a list of IP addresses indicating Network  
Time Protocol (NTP) servers available to the client. Servers SHOULD be listed in order of  
preference.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07  
Code  
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
Length  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
IP address  
Code. 8 bits. Always set to 3.  
Length. 8 bits. 4+ in multiples of 4.  
IP address. 32 bits. One or more IPv4 addresses.  
RFCs: [RFC 2132] DHCP Options.  
Updated by: RFC 3942.  
DHCP option 43 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
DHCP option 60 1+ Class-identifier. RFC 1533, RFC 2132 – must be the string value of:  
Nortel-221x- A or Nortel-61xx-A  
DHCP option 66 1+ TFTP server name. RFC 2132  
DHCP option 128 TFPT Server IP address.  
DHCP option 144 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
DHCP option 151 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
DHCP option 152 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
DHCP option 157 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
DHCP option 191 1+ Vendor specific information. RFC 1533, RFC 2132  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DHCP options 187  
DHCP support for handsets that emulate the IP Phone 2004  
DHCP support in the IP Phone 2004 terminal requires a Class Identifier  
option with each DHCP Discovery and Request message. Additionally,  
the IP Phone 2004 checks for either a Vendor Specific option message  
with a specific, unique to Nortel IP Phone 2004 encapsulated subtype, or a  
site-specific DHCP option. In either case, a Nortel IP Phone 2004 specific  
option must be returned by the IP Phone 2004 aware DHCP server in all  
Offer and Ack messages. The IP Phone 2004 uses the information returned  
in this option to configure itself for proper operation. This configuration  
includes binding a new IP address, netmask and gateway (for the local IP  
stack) as well as configuring Server 1 (minimum) and, optionally Server 2.  
By default, Server 1 is always assumed to be the primary server after a  
DHCP session.  
The IP Phone 2004 does not accept any Offers or Acks that do not contain  
all of the following options:  
a Router option  
The IP Phone 2004 requires a default router to function.  
a Subnet Mask option  
a Vendor Specific option  
OR  
a Site Specific option  
The initial DHCP implementation required only the Vendor Specific  
encapsulated suboption. In interop testing with WinNT (up to SR4), it  
was discovered that WinNT does not properly adhere to RFC 1541.  
As a result, it is not possible to use this option. The implementation  
was changed to add support for either Vendor Specific subops or Site  
Specific options. This new extension is tested and verified to work with  
WinNT.  
The site-specific options are all DHCP options between 128 (0x80)  
and 254 (0xFE). These options are reserved for site specific use by  
the DHCP RFCs.  
Format of the IP Phone 2004 Terminal DHCP Class Identifier field  
All IP Phone 2004 terminals fill in the Class ID field of the DHCP Discovery  
and Request messages with Nortel-i2004-A:  
ASCII-encoded, NULL (0x00) terminated  
unique to Nortel IP Phone 2004  
–A uniquely identifies this version  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
188 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Format of the IP Phone 2004 Terminal DHCP Encapsulated Vendor  
Specific option  
The following definition describes the Nortel IP Phone 2004 specific,  
Encapsulated Vendor Specific option. This option must be encapsulated  
in a DHCP Vendor Specific option (Refer to RFC 1541 and RFC 1533)  
and returned by the DHCP server as part of each DHCP OFFER and ACK  
message for the IP Phone 2004 to accept these messages as valid. The  
IP Phone 2004 pulls the relevant information out of this option and uses  
it to configure the primary and (optionally) secondary TPSs. Either this  
encapsulated option or a similarly encoded site-specific option must be  
present. Configure the DHCP server to send one or the other—but not  
both. WinNT implementations must use the Site Specific option. For more  
The format of the Encapsulated Vendor Specific option field is: Type,  
Length, Data.  
Type (1 octet): 5 choices: 0x80, 0x90, 0x9d, 0xbf, 0xfb (128, 144, 157,  
191, 251)  
With the choice of five types, the IP Phone 2004 can operate in  
environments where the initial choice is already in use by a different  
vendor. Select only one Type byte.  
Length (1 octet): variable—depends on message content  
Data (Length octets): ASCII-based—format Nortel-i2004-  
A,iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp,aaa,rrr;iii.jjj.kkk.lll:pppp,aaa,rrr  
— Nortel-i2004-A uniquely identifies this as the Nortel option.  
Additionally, the -A signifies this version of this specification. For  
example, future enhancements could use -B.  
— ASCII (,)—separates the fields  
— ASCII (;)—separates the primary from secondary server info  
— ASCII (.)—signals the end of the structure  
— iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp—identifies the IP:port for the server  
(ASCII-encoded decimal)  
— aaa—identifies the action for the server (ASCII-encoded decimal,  
range 0 to 255)  
— rrr—identifies the retry count for the server (ASCII-encoded decimal,  
range 0 to 255)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DHCP options 189  
This string can be NULL terminated although the NULL is not required  
for parsing.  
Notes:  
1.  
aaa and rrr are ASCII-encoded decimal numbers with a range of 0 to  
255. They identify the Action Code and Retry Count, respectively, for the  
associated TPS server. Internally, to the IP Phone 2004, they are stored  
as one octet (0x00..0xFF). These fields must be no longer than three digits.  
2.  
3.  
The first server is always considered the primary, and the second server  
always considered secondary.  
If only one server is required, terminate the primary TPS sequence  
immediately with (.) instead of (;).  
Example: Norteli2004- A,iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp,aaa,rrr  
4.  
5.  
The valid options are one server or two servers (0, 3, or other numbers  
are not allowed).  
The Action code values are:  
0 - reserved  
1 - UNIStim Hello (currently only this value is a valid choice)  
2 to 254 - reserved  
255 - reserved  
6.  
7.  
iii,jjj,kkk,lll are ASCII-encoded, decimal numbers representing the IP  
address of the server. They need not be three digits long because the (.)  
and (:) delimiters guarantee parsing. For example, ’001’, ’01’, and ’1’ are  
all parsed correctly and interpreted as value 0x01 internal to the IP Phone  
2004. These fields must be no longer than three digits each.  
ppppp is the port number in ASCII-encoded decimal. It need not be five  
digits long because the (:) and (,) delimiters guarantee parsing. For  
example, ’05001’, ’5001’, ’1’, and ’00001’ are all parsed correctly and  
accepted as correct. The valid range is 0 to 65535 (stored internally in  
the IP Phone 2004 as hexadecimal in the range 0 to 0xFFFF). This field  
must be no longer than five digits.  
8.  
In all cases, the IP Phone 2004 treats the ASCII-encoded numbers  
as decimal values and ignores all leading zeros. More specifically, a  
leading zero does not change the interpretation of the value to be OCTAL  
encoded. For example, 0021, 021, and 21 are all parsed and interpreted  
as decimal 21.  
Format of the IP Phone 2004 Terminal DHCP Site Specific option  
The following definition describes the Nortel IP Phone specific, Site Specific  
option. This option uses the DHCP options 128 to 254 (reserved for  
site-specific use, see RFC 1541 and RFC 1533) and must be returned by  
the DHCP server as part of each DHCP OFFER and ACK message for the  
IP Phone 2004 to accept these messages as valid. The IP Phone 2004 pulls  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
190 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
the relevant information out of this option and uses it to configure the primary  
and (optionally) secondary TPSs. Either this encapsulated option or a  
similarly encoded site-specific option must be present. Configure the DHCP  
server to send one or the other—but not both. WinNT implementations must  
use the Site Specific option. For more information, see "DHCP support for  
The format of the Terminal DHCP Site Specific option field is: Type, Length,  
Data.  
Type (1 octet): 5 choices: 0x80, 0x90, 0x9d, 0xbf, 0xfb (128, 144, 157,  
191, 251)  
With the choice of five types, the IP Phone 2004 can operate in  
environments where the initial choice is already in use by a different  
vendor. Select only one Type byte.  
Length (1 octet): variable—depends on message content  
Data (Length octets): ASCII-based—format Nortel-i2004-  
A,iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp,aaa,rrr;iii.jjj.kkk.lll:pppp,aaa,rrr  
— Nortel-i2004-A uniquely identifies this as the Nortel option.  
Additionally, the -A signifies this version of this specification. For  
example, future enhancements could use -B.  
— ASCII (,)—separates the fields  
— ASCII (;)—separates the primary from secondary server information  
— ASCII (.)—signals the end of the structure  
— iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp—identifies the IP:port for the server  
(ASCII-encoded decimal)  
— aaa—identifies the action for server (ASCII-encoded decimal, range  
0 to 255)  
— rrr—identifies the retry count for the server (ASCII-encoded decimal,  
range 0 to 255)  
This string can be NULL terminated although the NULL is not required  
for parsing.  
Notes:  
1.  
aaa and rrr are ASCII-encoded decimal numbers with a range of 0 to  
255. They identify the Action Code and Retry Count, respectively, for  
the associated TPS server. Internally, to the IP Phone 2004, they are  
stored as one octet (0x00..0xFF). These fields must be no longer than  
three digits.  
2.  
The first server is always considered the primary, and the second server  
always considered secondary.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quality of Service checklist for voice over WLAN applications 191  
Notes:  
3.  
If only one server is required, terminate the primary TPS sequence  
immediately with (.) instead of (;).  
Example: Norteli2004- A,iii.jjj.kkk.lll:ppppp,aaa,rrr  
4.  
5.  
The valid options are one server or two servers (0, 3, or other numbers  
are not allowed).  
The Action code values are:  
0 - reserved  
1 - UNIStim Hello (currently only this value is a valid choice)  
2 to 254 - reserved  
255 - reserved  
6.  
7.  
iii,jjj,kkk,lll are ASCII-encoded, decimal numbers representing the IP  
address of the server. They need not be three digits long because the (.)  
and (:) delimiters guarantee parsing. For example, ’001’, ’01’, and ’1’ are  
all parsed correctly and interpreted as value 0x01 internal to the IP Phone  
2004. These fields must be no longer than three digits each.  
ppppp is the port number in ASCII-encoded decimal. It need not be five  
digits long because the (:) and (,) delimiters guarantee parsing. For  
example, ’05001’, ’5001’, ’1’, and ’00001’ are all parsed correctly and  
accepted as correct. The valid range is 0 to 65535 (stored internally in  
the IP Phone 2004 as hexadecimal in the range 0 to 0xFFFF). This field  
must be no longer than five digits.  
8.  
In all cases, the IP Phone 2004 treats the ASCII-encoded numbers  
as decimal values and ignores all leading zeros. More specifically, a  
leading zero does not change the interpretation of the value to be OCTAL  
encoded. For example, 0021, 021, and 21 are all parsed and interpreted  
as decimal 21.  
Quality of Service checklist for voice over WLAN applications  
The following QoS checklist pertains to voice over WLAN (VoWLAN)  
applications that use the WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212.  
1.  
For more information about SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) and why  
you need it, see the SpectraLink Voice Priority White Paper available  
2.  
WLAN Access points must be SVP- or View-compatible as tested  
by SpectraLink Corp. Nortel requires all WLAN networks that carry  
voice be SVP-enabled or use WMM to receive NETS and GNTS  
support. For more information about SVP Compatible APs, go to  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
192 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
3.  
Enable SVP in the APs. SVP must be enabled in all APs that carry voice  
traffic. Not all AP vendors use SVP terminology. Cisco 350,1100, and  
1200 series APs, for instance, refer to SVP compatibility as Protocol 119  
support. The SpectraLink Web site provides AP settings used in SVP  
compatibility testing. To download the AP configuration manuals, go to  
4.  
Configure the admissions limit in the 2245 Wireless IP telephony  
manager. The value you chose limits high-priority clients such as voice  
terminals from overloading an AP. The Nortel-recommended value is  
7. An admissions limit higher than 7 can severely limit bandwidth to  
data users when voice traffic is high. To increase bandwidth for data,  
lower the admissions limit so that fewer voice terminals handover to  
the AP. WLAN performance studies with 802.11b radios show that the  
admissions limit must not exceed 10.  
5.  
6.  
Handsets require a relative signal strength (RSSI) of -70dB or better  
for high QoS. When the RSSI drops below -70dB, handsets attempt to  
handover to an AP with a higher RSSI.  
Up to three APs can occupy the same area because 802.11b provides  
three nonoverlapping channels. Handsets require like-channels,  
between adjacent APs, to have 15-20dB of separation to achieve good  
QoS and to avoid ping-pong between APs, which impacts QoS by  
creating constant handover.  
7.  
8.  
WLAN infrastructure must be configured for high performance with delay  
between 221x handset and 2245 less than 100 ms, less than 1% packet  
loss and less than 30 ms jitter. WLAN networks that previously only  
supported data applications sometimes cannot meet this performance  
criteria and consequently are not be suitable for voice services.  
RF cochannel interference reduces both the capacity and reach of WLAN  
networks. Use site surveys to plan coverage areas and scan them to  
insure that Rogue APs are not present. Cochannel interference can also  
be created by florescent light, microwave ovens, 2.4 GHz analog or  
digital telephones, Bluetooth adapters, and 2.4 GHz frequency-hopping  
applications such as first generation AP or DECT 2.4 GHz wireless.  
9.  
Building construction can impact RF. Metal floors, metal walls, and metal  
ceilings can create RF signal reflections, and create a scenario known  
as multipath, which creates interference to the voice packet stream.  
10.  
Handsets have a built-in Site Survey mode that shows the actual RSSI  
from the four strongest APs at any current location. Use Site Survey  
mode to determine holes in coverage that can create dropped calls or  
poor voice QoS.  
11.  
Poor voice QoS received in handsets is caused, 70% of the time, by  
problems in the infrastructure, such as missing SVP enabled, poor RSSI  
coverage, cochannel interference, Ethernet duplex mismatch, excessive  
retransmission of packets, or other RF interference.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quality of Service checklist for voice over WLAN applications 193  
RF basics and AP configuration  
The following points include the characteristics of a good RF environment  
that uses access point parameters for Nortel wireless telephone voice  
communications. Only channels 1, 6, and 11 are used.  
Disable auto-channel select features and use fixed channels.  
Fix the transmit (TX) power setting and disable auto-power features.  
Ensure that access points have a consistent and same power setting,  
unless there is a compelling reason to deviate  
Configure areas where wireless telephone users can congregate with  
special care:  
— Position APs closer together to provide greater bandwidth for an  
area.  
Turn down the AP TX power.  
It is a very complicated process to accomplish this task properly.  
Configure the wireless telephone transmit power levels to match the  
standard for the RF environment.  
Consider the antenna gain used on the access points when adjusting  
the wireless telephone power setting.  
Ensure that there is -70dBm RF signaling or better available in all areas  
designated for wireless telephone operation.  
For this signaling requirement, all four 802.11b data rates must be  
available to the wireless telephones. The four 802.11b data rates are:  
1Mb/s, 2Mb/s, 5.5Mb/s, and 11Mb/s.  
The best configuration is for all four to be configured to Basic or  
Required. For manufacturer-specific settings, see the guidelines from  
SpectraLink. Define this parameter, as Basic or Required, in the AP  
and configure the following:  
— 802.11g data rates can be configured to Enabled.  
— Multicast packets use only 802.11b data rates configured to Basic  
or Required.  
— If 802.11 wireless devices are used, 5.5Mb/s and 11Mb/s can  
require the parameter be configured to Enabled or Supported, rather  
than Basic.  
Ensure that there is a compelling reason to do so, before you make  
this change.  
Configure the Beacon interval to 100 ms and DTIM to 3.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
194 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Use appropriate security mechanisms for the wireless telephones and  
the requirements of the environment:  
— Nortel WLAN IP Telephony telephones support WEP, WPA-PSK,  
or WPA2-PSK.  
— Nortel recommends that you always use Open Authentication  
because it is more secure.  
You can use a No WEP temporary SSID during troubleshooting so  
that you can gather wireless data with visibility into the SpectraLink  
Radio Protocol (SRP) data structures.  
After troubleshooting is complete, disable this temporary SSID.  
Ensure 15% to 20% cell overlap between AP signal coverage areas.  
Always use two antennas on each AP.  
— Enable diversity in each AP.  
— Use full diversity in each AP, not partial or one-way diversity.  
— Make this the standard for the RF environment.  
Very special circumstances must exist before you make changes.  
Provide priority for IP protocol 119 packets:  
— Assign voice packets to an AP QoS Class of Service with a latency  
of 10 ms or less.  
— Configure priority for both directions in both interfaces.  
Priority gets the voice packets ahead of the queue inside the AP,  
whether the interface is 802.11b radio or Ethernet.  
— Configure Voice Radio Contention Window Minimum to 0.  
— Configure Voice Radio Contention Window Maximum to 0.  
— Configure Voice Fixed Slot Size to 2.  
— Configure Voice Transmit Opportunity to 0.  
On the Cisco Aironet 1200 Series with code 12.3(8)JA3 or later, click  
WFA Default on QoS Radio 802.11g. Access the Categories page and  
then configure the parameters for voice. This version has two boxes to  
configure for each parameter. Do not click Optimize for Voice.  
Enable WiFi Multi-Media (WMM) on the radio interface.  
Use VLAN support in the AP and in the network for security and  
management:  
— Assign the voice SSID to a VLAN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Quality of Service checklist for voice over WLAN applications 195  
— Enable the voice VLAN across the network between the AP, to  
the SVP, to the Signaling Server, to the Call Manager and all  
components in between.  
— Assign all devices in this VLAN to one subnet.  
Ideally, there is no routing between any network devices used  
for voice communication.  
If routing is necessary, keep it in the back-end, between the SVP  
and PBX Call Server. Keep routing short and quick.  
There are other access point parameters necessary for the proper operation  
of voice communications. Often, these are not adjustable. By specifying  
IP protocol 119 the following parameters are enabled on the voice path  
in the access point:  
Voice packet retry limit of three  
If a voice packet is not ACKed, it is retried three times and then dropped.  
This parameter must be enabled in the code to be able to control the  
number of packet retries and limit them to three. There are access  
points that identify IP protocol 119 (SpectraLink voice packets), to limit  
packet retries to three and other access points simply identify voice  
transmissions to limit retries.  
Round Robin Queuing  
During voice packet retry transmissions, the AP can also transmit  
other voice packets in the queue. This ability prevents other wireless  
telephones that use the AP from having their voice communications held  
up while retries occur. This causes all other wireless telephones to have  
poor audio while one wireless telephone is in a retry state.  
These parameters can be invoked by specifying the voice profile or IP  
protocol 119 < 10 ms latency. Disable the following parameters:  
Dynamic Transmit Power at the Control (DTPC) for wireless clients  
AP Dynamic TX Power (or configure to On Demand Only)  
AP Dynamic Channel Select (or configure to On Demand Only)  
Intrusion Detection System (IDS) involvement  
IDS causes the AP to go off channel and listen for other wireless clients  
and APs. This causes degraded voice quality.  
Load balancing at the AP for clients and network  
Interference detection and avoidance  
Coverage hole detection and correction  
Client Holdoff Time  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
EAP or MAC Reauthentication interval  
TKIP MIC Failure Holdoff Time  
Troubleshooting  
Ensure that the WLAN IP Telephony and PBX product mix lines up with the  
compatibility matrix in the current Product Bulletin.  
If the site does not conform, it is not classified as a supported installation.  
Diagnosis flows  
The following sections provide information about the troubleshooting  
process for different types of issues.  
Call or signalling-related issues  
Signaling issues are not normally a result of an issue with the IP data  
network. However, if an IP data network is congested or configured  
incorrectly, signaling traffic can be affected. Because call signaling is  
normally a combination of H.323 (TCP)- and Reliable User Datagram  
Protocol (RUDP) (IP Sets)-based traffic, the packets usually reach the  
destination, barring any IP network configuration issues. However, these  
packets could drop and cause excessive retransmission and delay. As an  
example, the IP phones keep-alive communication with the signaling server  
can be affected.  
Table 24  
Typical call-related issues  
Issue  
Type of  
issue  
Check for  
Unable to place  
a call  
Network  
IP phone:  
IP connectivity to Signaling server  
IP connectivity issues to other IP sets  
Excessive congestion or retransmissions  
Analog or digital phone:  
IP trunk connectivity issues  
Product  
Network  
IP, analog, or digital phone:  
Phone configuration  
Dial plan  
IP phone  
resetting  
IP connectivity to Signaling server  
Network congestion  
Product  
Network  
Incorrect phone configuration  
Call disconnects  
or drops during a  
conversation  
Intermittent network congestion that affects  
the keep-alive  
Product  
Signaling issues  
Incorrect configuration  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting 197  
Voice-quality issues  
The transport, or IP data network, are the most likely causes of voice-quality  
issues. In some circumstances, product issues (such as echo or Digital  
Signal Processor (DSP) errors) can cause problems with voice quality.  
The data network does not introduce echo into a conversation, but it can  
enhance existing echo.  
In a converged environment, voice competes with data traffic for bandwidth  
and processor time. As a result, the IP data network must be optimized for  
efficient processing of the real-time voice packets.  
Table 25  
Typical voice quality issues  
Issue  
Type of  
issue  
Check for  
Choppy voice  
Network  
(usually)  
Network delay caused by:  
Excessive intermittent end-to-end round-trip  
delay  
Congestion  
Queuing  
Network configuration errors  
Packet loss caused by:  
Physical errors in data network  
Network configuration errors  
First or last part  
of word syllables  
missing  
Product  
(usually)  
Incorrect Voice Activity Detection (VAD)  
configuration  
OR  
Incorrect AP configuration (if the issue occurs  
only during roaming)  
Clicks or pops  
heard during  
conversation  
Packet loss, cause depends on the codec  
One-way speech  
path  
Network  
IP routing issues  
Congestion issues  
Product  
Network  
Incorrect configuration  
Voice delay  
(users talk over  
each other)  
Excessive network delay  
Echo  
Network  
Data network can enhance echo  
Product  
(primarily)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Handset error messages  
appear on the liquid crystal diode (LCD) display of the wireless handsets.  
Table 26  
Handset error messages  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
Short  
Assert  
Assert Errors  
The phone detects possible  
network errors and cannot  
recover without configuration  
modification.  
Verify the AP settings: data  
rates and fragmentation  
threshold.  
Use the Configuration  
Cradle to capture the assert  
error and then send the  
error to Nortel GNTS.  
Code  
Bad Code Type  
DHCP Error(s)  
The license management  
setting on phone is incorrect.  
Adjust the license  
management setting.  
DHCP  
A problem communicating  
with DHCP server exists.  
Troubleshoot the DHCP  
server configuration and the  
network.  
DHCP  
Can’t Renew DHCP  
Duplicate ID  
The DHCP server is  
not responding to a  
lease-renewal attempt.  
Troubleshoot the DHCP  
server configuration and the  
network.  
Duplicate  
Two phones are configured  
with the same IP address.  
Configure a valid static  
IP address for the  
phone. Check the DHCP  
configuration.  
ESSID  
Bad ESSID  
The ESSID on the phone  
does not match the SSID on  
the AP.  
Configure the correct ESSID  
statically on the phone.  
Flash  
Config  
Flash Config Error  
No Net Found  
No Net Access  
The internal configuration of  
the phone is corrupt.  
Restore the phone defaults  
and enter the configuration  
information.  
No Net  
No Net  
The ESSID on the phone  
does not match the SSID on  
the AP.  
Configure the correct ESSID  
statically on the phone.  
The security settings on the  
phone do not match the  
security settings on the AP.  
Check the AP security  
settings and configure the  
security settings for the  
phone to match.  
PBX  
No PBX  
The phone is not  
communicating with the  
PBX.  
Check the cross connects,  
bridge clips, punch downs  
on demarcation block,  
amphenol tail. and PBX  
(see if the extension is built  
correctly).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Timing information 199  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
Configure the Ethernet  
Short  
SVP  
No SVP Response  
The phone cannot  
communicate with the WLAN switch port and SVP to  
IP Telephony Manager 2245. 100/full. Forward the DHCP  
option 151 to the IP of the  
SVP server. Verify the  
settings on the AP. Verify  
that there is no 2.4 Ghz  
interference of any kind.  
SVP  
No SVP IP  
No static IP entered into  
the phone for the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245.  
Check for a valid IP in the  
phone. Check the license  
management configuration.  
Compare a working phone  
code to the nonworking  
phone code.  
SW  
No SW Found  
System Locked  
No phone code is found on  
the TFTP server.  
Point the TFTP software to  
the correct directory that  
contains valid code.  
System  
The WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245 is locked.  
Dial in and verify that system  
is locked. Soft reset the  
SpectraLink infrastructure  
through the menu system.  
TFTP  
TFTP Error(s)  
A failure occurred during the  
TFTP software update.  
Check the TFTP software  
(SolarWinds is not  
compatible). Check  
the TFTP configuration.  
Forward option 66 in the  
DHCP scope, to the IP  
address of the TFTP server.  
Timing information  
The WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 sends payload packets to the  
handset every 30 ms in a 5 ms window. The handsets are likely to  
experience issues if the jitter between the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 and the AP is greater than 5 ms. Ideally, jitter in this part of the  
network is 1 ms or less.  
Table 27  
Timing  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 Handset to the  
to the AP  
WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
Delay 100 ms  
Jitter 1 ms  
Delay 100 ms  
Jitter 30 ms  
Packet loss 2%  
Packet loss 2%  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
200 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
The handset sends a handshake to the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 every 30 seconds. If no response is received from the WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245, the handset tries four more times, for a total of  
five attempts. If none of these get a response from the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245, the handset attempts to find a different AP and repeats  
the above handshake sequence. If the handset cannot find another AP or  
the second attempt fails, the No SVP Response message appears on the  
handset LCD display.  
Diagnostic Tools  
Run Site Survey, Diagnostics Mode, and Syslog Mode are provided to assist  
the WLAN administrator to evaluate the functioning of the handset and the  
VoWLAN system. These tools are enabled from the handset Admin menu.  
Run Site Survey for the WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212  
Site Survey is used to evaluate the facility coverage before certifying that  
an installation is complete. It can also be used at any time to evaluate  
coverage by testing signal strength, to gain information about an AP, and  
to scan an area to look for all APs, regardless of ESSID. The information  
available through Site Survey includes:  
ESSID  
beacon interval  
information regarding support of various protocols and standards, as  
required  
current security configuration  
When Run Site Survey begins, it is in single ESSID mode. Press the Any  
soft key to switch to all APs (regardless of ESSID) mode; the Any soft key  
changes to MyID. The display looks like the following in multiple AP mode:  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
MyID  
444  
444  
444  
444  
Detl  
where  
111111 = last three octets of the ESSID for the discovered AP  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Diagnostic Tools 201  
22 = signal strength of the specified AP  
33 = channel number of the specified AP  
4444 = DTIM interval configured for the specified AP  
MyID = soft key to toggle between single and any ESSID mode  
Detl = soft key to toggle between summary and detail screens  
Press the Detl soft key to view the details, as follows:  
i:bbbbb sn ch bcn  
eeeeeeeeeee DGHI  
rrrrrrrrrrrrr+xxxx  
mmm G:gggg P:pppp  
Any  
Smry  
where  
i = index of selected AP (range: 0-3)  
bbbbb = last three octets of the ESSID for a discovered AP  
sn = signal strength in -dBm  
ch = channel  
bcn = beacon interval  
eeeeeeeeeee = ESSID (up to first 11 characters)  
DGHI = standards supported  
rrrrr = rates supported (example: 1b2b5b11b)  
+ = more rates supported than displayed  
xxxx = WMM or UPSD if supported  
mmmm = security mode  
G:gggg = group key security  
P:pppp = pair-wise key security  
Any = soft key to toggle between single and multiple ESSID mode  
Smry = soft key to return to summary display  
Run Site Survey for the WLAN Handset 6120/6140  
Site Survey is used to evaluate the facility coverage before certifying that an  
installation is complete. It can also be used at any time to evaluate coverage  
by testing signal strength, to gain information about an AP, and to scan  
an area to look for all APs, regardless of SSID. The information available  
through Site Survey includes:  
SSID  
beacon interval  
information regarding support of various protocols and standards, as  
required  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
202 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
current security configuration  
When Run Site Survey begins, it is in single SSID mode. Press the Any  
soft key to switch to all APs (regardless of SSID) mode; the Any soft key  
changes to MyID. The display looks like the following in multiple AP mode:  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
111111 -22 33  
MyID  
444  
444  
444  
444  
Detl  
where  
111111 = last three octets of the SSID for the discovered AP  
22 = signal strength of the specified AP  
33 = channel number of the specified AP  
4444 = DTIM interval configured for the specified AP  
MyID = soft key to toggle between single and any SSID mode  
Detl = soft key to toggle between summary and detail screens  
The following display shows three APs configured with an SSID that  
matches that of the handset. The first has a signal strength of –28dBm, and  
is configured on channel 2 with a beacon interval of 100 ms. The second  
has a signal strength of –48dBm, and is configured on channel 6 with a  
beacon interval of 200 ms. The third has a signal strength of –56dBm and is  
configured on channel 11 with a beacon interval of 100 ms.  
100  
200  
100  
Detl  
ab7bc8 -28 02  
2ae578 -48 06  
2ae596 -56 11  
Any  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic Tools 203  
When you select Any SSID mode, the summary display contains the first  
six characters of the APs SSID instead of the beacon interval, as shown in  
the following example.  
ab7b -28 02  
2ae5 -48 06  
2ae5 -56 11  
Any  
ALPHA  
WSMTES  
voice  
Detl  
In detail mode, the display appears as follows. The left and right arrow keys  
move between AP indices.  
i:bbbbb sn ch bcn  
eeeeeeeeeee DGHI  
rrrrrrrrrrrrr+xxxx  
mmm G:gggg P:pppp  
Any  
Smry  
where  
i = index of selected AP (value is from 0 to 3 inclusive)  
bbbbb = last three octets of the SSID for a discovered AP  
sn = signal strength in -dBm  
ch = channel  
bcn = beacon interval  
eeeeeeeeeee = SSID (up to first 11 characters)  
DGHI = standards supported  
rrrrr = rates supported—basic rates have a b following the rate  
+ = more rates supported than displayed  
xxxx = WMM or UPSD if supported  
mmmm = security mode  
G:gggg = group key security  
P:pppp = pair-wise key security  
Any/MyID = soft key to toggle between single and multiple SSID mode  
Detl/Smry = soft key to toggle between the multiple AP display  
(summary) and the single AP display (detail)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
ATTENTION  
Numbers racing across the handset display indicate that AP information is being  
obtained. A Waiting message indicates that the system is not configured properly  
and the handset cannot find any APs.  
Diagnostics Mode  
Diagnostics Mode evaluates the overall quality of the link between the  
handsets, AP, and the infrastructure equipment (call server, WLAN IP  
Telephony Manager 2245, and gateways). Diagnostics Mode can be used  
when the handset is active.  
When Diagnostics Mode is activated in the Admin menu, the handset enters  
the diagnostic state. The handset can display diagnostics any time it is  
on a call.  
Pressing the Menu key displays a number of diagnostic counters. Five  
screens of counters can be displayed by pressing the Menu key to scroll  
through the following screens:  
Screen 1—displays counters for missed receive packets, missed  
transmit packets, receive retry count, and transmit retry count.  
Screen 2—displays jitter delta, last successful transmit data rate, and  
gateway type.  
Screen 3—displays a list of APs and some of their details.  
Screen 4—displays association and reassociation counts.  
Screen 5—displays security error count and sequence number for last  
security error.  
After all the counters are displayed, the screen returns to the normal  
off-hook display.  
The screen number appears on the top line of the screen.  
Diagnostics Screen 1 displays the following information:  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
MissedRcvCnt  
MissedXmtCnt  
RxRetryCount  
TxRetryCount  
where  
MissedRcvCnt is the missed receive packet count since power up.  
MissedXmtCnt is the missed transmit packet count since power up.  
RxRetryCount is the receive retry count since power up.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostic Tools 205  
TxRetryCount is the transmit retry count since power up.  
Diagnostics Screen 2 displays the following information:  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
mnemo  
Jitter  
LastRate  
GatewayType  
where  
Jitter is the current delta from the desired jitter buffer depth, in  
microseconds.  
LastRate is the last successful transmit data rate.  
GatewayType is a mnemonic that indicates the gateway type. The  
mnemonic is one of:  
SAWA2  
all phones are rate limited to 2 Mb because  
an old 2 Mb handset is on the network (not  
applicable for the WLAN Handset 6120 and  
the WLAN Handset 6140)  
2Mb  
old style 2 Mb (not applicable for the WLAN  
Handset 6120 and the WLAN Handset 6140)  
11Mb  
New style 11 Mb (for all handsets)  
Diagnostics Screen 3 displays a list of the APs that are heard, in the  
following format:  
C : mmmm ch - ss  
1 : mmmm ch - ss  
2 : mmmm ch - ss  
3 : mmmm ch - ss  
aid  
mnem  
mnem  
mnem  
where  
C is the AP currently in use.  
1, 2, and 3 are the candidate APs.  
mmmm is the hexadecimal number comprised of the last two octets of  
the AP MAC address.  
ch is the channel number that the AP is configured on.  
ss is the signal strength for the AP in dBm.  
aid is the Association ID of the currently associated AP.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
mnem is a mnemonic that indicates why the handset did not hand off to  
this candidate:  
Unkn  
Weak  
Rate  
Full  
reason unknown  
signal strength too weak  
One or more basic rates not supported  
AP cannot handle bandwidth requirements  
Authentication Timeout  
Authentication Failure  
Association Timeout  
AthT  
AthF  
AscT  
AscF  
SecT  
SecF  
Cnfg  
Association Failure  
Security Timeout  
Security Failure  
Configuration error—AP is not configured correctly (check  
security, QoS mode, or network infrastructure)  
Diagnostics Screen 4 displays the following information:  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
AssocCount  
ReAssocCount  
AsssocFailure  
ReAssocFail  
where  
AssocCount is the association count since power up.  
ReAssocCount is the reassociation count since power up.  
AssocFailure is the number of association failures since power up.  
ReAssocFail is the number of reassociation failures since power up.  
Diagnostics Screen 5 displays the following information:  
nnnnn  
nnnnn  
Sec-ErrCount  
LstSecErrSeq  
where  
Sec-ErrCount is the security error count since power up.  
LstSecErrSeq is the MAC frame sequence number with the last  
security error.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic Tools 207  
Syslog Mode  
A Syslog Server must be present on the network so that the handset can  
send log messages and have them saved. The Syslog Server IP address  
can be configured using DHCP or statically configured.  
Note: If the Syslog Server address is blank (000.000.000.000 or  
255.255.255.255) or the handset is using DHCP and no option 7 is  
received from the DHCP server, the handset does not send any syslog  
messages.  
Each syslog message includes the following:  
Date and time (to 1100th of a second) since the handset power on  
(configured to January 1 00:0:00); requires an SNTP server  
WLAN Handset MAC address  
WLAN Handset IP address  
Sequence number  
plus, additional items, based on the message type, as shown in Table 28  
Message example:  
Jan 1 00:01:26 0090.7a02.2a1b (172.16.0.46) [001a] RStat: AP  
00:40:96:48:1D:0C (-56dBm), Sent 783523, Recvd 791342, MSnt 245, MRcd  
5674, BSnt 43, BRcd 10783, TX drop 43 (0.0%), TX retry 578 (1.2%), RX retry  
1217 (1.6%).  
the syslog messages.  
Table 28  
Syslog message contents  
Syslog message  
Contents  
Failed Handoff  
Failed AP MAC  
(sent whenever the handset decided to hand  
off, but failed trying)  
Failed AP signal strength  
Current AP MAC  
Current AP signal strength  
Failure reason  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
208 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Syslog message  
Contents  
Successful Handoff  
New AP MAC  
New AP signal strength  
Old AP MAC  
Old AP signal strength  
Reason for handoff  
Other candidate APS:  
MAC  
Signal strength  
Reason not used  
Security Error  
AP MAC  
AP signal strength  
Security mode  
Error details (mode dependent)  
Call type (telephony, OAI, PTT)  
Call Start  
Call End  
AP MAC  
AP signal strength  
AP MAC  
AP signal strength  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic Tools 209  
Syslog message  
Contents  
Audio stats (AStat)  
AP MAC  
AP signal strength  
Payload size (in ms)  
Payloads sent  
Payloads received  
Payloads missed (not received)  
Payloads missed rate (over last 5 seconds)  
Payloads late  
Payloads late rate (over last 5 seconds)  
Average jitter  
AP MAC  
Audio threshold (AThresh) exceeded  
(Sent if payloads missed rate or payloads late  
rate exceeds 2%, or if the average jitter is over  
2 ms)  
AP signal strength  
Payload size (in ms)  
Payloads sent  
Payloads received  
Payloads missed (not received)  
Payloads missed rate (over last 5 seconds)  
Payloads late  
Payloads late rate (over last 5 seconds)  
Average jitter  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Syslog message  
Contents  
Radio stats (NStat)  
AP MAC  
AP signal strength  
Directed packets sent  
Directed packets received  
Multicast packets sent  
Multicast packets received  
Broadcast packets sent  
Broadcast packets received  
TX dropped count  
TX drop rate (over last 5 seconds)  
TX retry count  
TX retry rate (over last 5 seconds)  
RX retry count  
RX retry rate (over last 5 seconds)  
AP MAC  
Radio threshold (NThresh) exceeded  
(Sent if TX drop rate exceeds 2%, or TX or RX  
retry rate exceeds 5%)  
AP signal strength  
Directed packets sent  
Directed packets received  
Multicast packets sent  
Multicast packets received  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic Tools 211  
Syslog message  
Contents  
Broadcast packets sent  
Broadcast packets received  
TX dropped count  
TX drop rate (over last 5 seconds)  
TX retry count  
TX retry rate (over last 5 seconds)  
RX retry count  
RX retry rate (over last 5 seconds)  
VPN: Established IKE phase 1 SA, renew in xs  
VPN: Established IKE phase2 SA yy:yy, renew  
in xs  
Expiration time and security association  
identifiers, if applicable.  
(a phase1 message follows the phase 2  
message, sent whenever a phase 1 or phase 2  
security association completes)  
xs is the number of seconds  
yy:yy stands for the two eight-digit SA numbers  
for send and receive  
none  
VPN: phase2 Unexpected message  
VPN: phase2 Initiated by VN server  
VPN: phase2 INFO Delete payload  
Table 29  
Syslog reason codes  
Reason code  
number  
Meaning  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OK  
TOO FEW AVERAGE PROBES  
WORSE SIGNAL  
INVALID SSID  
NO PARAMS FOUND  
BAD RATES  
OFF CHANNEL PROBE RESP  
AP TOO BUSY  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Reason code  
number  
Meaning  
8
AUTH TIMEOUT  
9
ASSOC TIMEOUT  
FAILED AUTHENTICATION  
FAILED ASSOCIATION  
SOFT NEIGHBOR  
NO SIG IMPROVEMENT  
NO KEEPALIVE  
10  
11  
12  
13  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
LOST AUDIO  
NO RESPONSE  
NO PRIVACY  
APP UNHAPPY  
DISASSOCIATED  
NO HANDOFF  
HANDOFF  
INITIAL ASSOC  
LOST AP  
TX FAILURES  
CHANGING RATES  
UNDEFINED  
EAP START TIMEOUT  
LEAP CHALLENGE TIMEOUT  
EAP SUCCESS TIMEOUT  
LEAP CHALLENGE RESPONSE TIMEOUT  
NONCE CCKM TIMEOUT  
RSNIE AP TIMEOUT  
NONCE GTK TIMEOUT  
EAPOL LOGOFF  
EAPOL FAILURE  
NO WPA ELEMENT  
BAD MIC  
BAD PROBE RESP  
BAD CAP INFO AD HOC  
ACTION TIMEOUT  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data capture 213  
Reason code  
number  
Meaning  
43  
44  
45  
46  
FAILED ACTION  
DELTS  
QOS REQUIRED  
CHANGED LISTEN INTERVAL  
Data capture  
Use the information presented in this section to begin capturing the correct  
data for analysis.  
Questions  
Ask the following questions to help isolate the source of a problem:  
Is the issue present with handsets that are associated to the same  
AP—yes or no?  
Is the issue present with handsets that are associated to different APs,  
which are associated to same controller—yes or no?  
Is the issue present with handsets that are associated to different APs,  
which are associated to two different controllers in the same mobility  
group—yes or no?  
Data checklist  
Gather the following data from the site for analysis:  
wired ip sniffer trace on the mirrored port for the WLAN IP Telephony  
Manager 2245  
wireless ip sniffer trace at the AP to which the test handset is associated  
syslog capture  
For more information, see "Syslog capture configuration" (page 215).  
logs of the event from the Signaling Server  
isetShow output from the Signaling Server or from the Voice Gateway  
Media Card (VGMC) running as Leader  
screenshots of each screen in the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
screenshots of the DHCP server scope with the fields fully expanded  
(no truncation of data in the view)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
214 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Figure 34  
DHCP scope  
Notes:  
1.  
Before you begin the data capture, disable any encryption protocols so  
that the data can be analyzed. If this is not possible, you must supply  
the encryption keys.  
2.  
Time sync the wired and wireless IP sniffer traces (to the second if  
possible) and note whatever difference is present. This is crucial for the  
captures to be analyzed as a whole event.  
3.  
4.  
Include the Nortel case number and the capture date in the name of each  
file.  
Use a compression program to compress the files before you send them. If  
the files are password protected, send the passwords in a separate e-mail.  
ATTENTION  
VERY IMPORTANT  
All captures, except the screenshots, must be concurrent during the same time  
frame that the problem scenario is executed. This ensures that each capture is for  
the same problem scenario.  
Site-data required for the capture analysis  
To analyze the captured data, certain site information is required. Ensure  
that the information is current for the time at which you obtain the captures.  
Gather the following information for your site:  
the MAC address of the test handset  
the alias IP of the test handset  
the DHCP supplied IP or manually configured static IP of the test  
handset  
the IP and MAC addresses of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
the TLAN and ELAN IPs for the Signaling Servers  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Data capture 215  
the TLAN and ELAN IPs for the Voice Gateway Media Cards (VGMC)  
a network diagram  
For more information, see "Network diagram" (page 215).  
a site survey  
screenshots of the DHCP server scope with the fields fully expanded  
(no truncation of data in the view)  
the encryption protocol  
the software version of the WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245  
the firmware version of the test handset  
the release (RLS) of the PBX software  
the version of the code that currently runs on the Signaling Servers  
the software version on the VGMCs  
the make, model and software version of the AP, the Controller or the  
WLAN Manager  
Network diagram  
For each element in the network, include the following information as it  
applies to each element:  
manufacturer  
model identification  
software version  
firmware version  
loadware version  
IP addresses  
MAC addresses  
port assignments  
VLANs  
other connectivity information  
Syslog capture configuration  
Configure DHCP Option 7 with the IP of the Syslog Server or, if you are not  
using DHCP, configure this manually as a static entry in the handset  
Configure the IP of the Syslog Server in the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245: Network configuration > Syslog Server.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
216 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Configure the handset:  
Admin Menu > Diagnostics > Diagnostics mode on  
Admin Menu > Diagnostics > Syslog mode > full  
If a Syslog Server is not available, use a public domain Syslog—for  
more information, see the KIWI Syslog Daemon available from  
Signaling Server log capture  
Use the CLI to obtain a log capture from the Signaling Server (SS).  
Procedure 29  
Using the CLI to capture a Signaling Server log  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Open a telnet session to the SS.  
Start a file capture of the telnet session.  
Use the level 2 pdt password for the system to enter pdt.  
Change to the directory where the logs are stored.  
For more information, see the appropriate NTP for the system.  
5
6
Determine the date stamps of the log files that cover the time frame  
for the problem scenario:  
ll  
For a log file, run the command:  
rdopen log000xx.rpt  
The response from the SS is Reading log000xx.rpt.  
7
For the same log file, run the command:  
rdall  
8
Repeat Step 6 and Step 7 for each log file.  
End the telnet file capture.  
9
10  
Zip the capture and send it to Nortel.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Data capture 217  
General data capture  
Before you run the show run-config or debug commands, enable text  
capturing on your Hyper terminal or Telnet application that you use to  
access the WLAN Security Switch 2270.  
Multiple times is better—copy and paste the following commands on the  
WLAN Security Switch 2270 CLI, rather than typing them individually. The  
screen begins scrolling with output as soon as you type the commands.  
show run-config (from all WLAN Security Switch 2270s)  
show tech support  
show msglog  
The wired sniffer must sniff the Gig port of the WLAN Security Switch 2270.  
No capture filter is required; get everything.  
Obtain the wireless capture from the channel that the handsets currently  
use. Configure the wireless sniffer to capture from only one channel. To  
determine which channel, first show the client summary. Look for the MAC  
of the client showing status associated and note the name of the AP beside  
it. To see the channel that the AP operates on, show the advanced 802.11b  
summary.  
captures" (page 217), to capture data to send to Nortel for analysis.  
Procedure 30  
Obtaining the wired and wireless captures  
Step Action  
1
Run the command:  
debug airwave-director all enable  
Let this command run for 5 to 7 minutes.  
2
3
Run the command:  
debug disable-all  
Run the following debug commands from the WLAN Security Switch  
2270 (that you are testing) in the CLI:  
debug dot11 mobile enable  
debug dot11 state enable  
debug mobility directory enable  
debug mobility handoff enable  
debug pem state enable  
debug pem events enable  
show debug  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
218 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
4
5
6
7
8
Start the wireless and wired sniffer captures.  
Initiate a handset to handset regular call or Push-to-talk call.  
Continue the voice conversation for 1 to 2 minutes.  
End the call that you established in Step 5.  
End debug; copy and paste the following commands on the CLI:  
debug disable-all  
show debug  
9
Stop the wired and wireless captures.  
10  
Zip the captures and send them to Nortel.  
—End—  
Scan for interference. MetaGeek Wi-Spy 2.4GHz Spectrum Analyzer is one  
low-cost option. For more information, go to www.metageek.net.  
Capture assert error messages with the Configuration Cradle  
One of the key features of the Configuration Cradle is the ability to extract  
assert error data when the handset (WLAN Handset 2210/2211/2212)  
encounters an exception condition and cannot recover from it gracefully.  
This dump contains information with which the design team can quickly  
isolate and fix the problem.  
The Assert Error message appears on the LCD display after the handset  
detects a system error from which it cannot recover. The assert error data is  
stored in flash memory until you power cycle the handset. You can use the  
Configuration Cradle to retrieve this information as an .asrt file, which you  
can then send to Nortel technical support for further debugging.  
218) to record and retrieve assert error data.  
ATTENTION  
Do not replace the battery pack before you perform the steps in Procedure 31  
Procedure 31  
Recording an assert error message  
Step Action  
1
Write down the error message that appears on the LCD display.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Network speech levels 219  
2
While the Config program is running, remove the battery pack and  
place the handset in the Configuration Cradle.  
3
4
5
Open the File menu and select Get Assert Information.  
Browse to the location to which you want to save the .asrt file.  
Click Get Assert Data.  
The handset uploads the .asrt file to the location that you specified  
in Step 4.  
6
Call Nortel Technical Support and make arrangements to e-mail the  
file and error message from the display.  
—End—  
Network speech levels  
levels for digital sets—end-to-end performance.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
220 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Figure 35  
Network speech levels  
Reference documents  
Table 30 "References" (page 220) lists reference documents and  
related-reading for this appendix.  
Table 30  
References  
Title  
Revision  
Source and type  
Comments  
Nortel  
Product Bulletin  
WLAN Handset  
2210/2211  
January 2006  
Up-issue  
553-3001-304  
Nortel  
NTP  
Standard 4.00  
August 2005  
(not applicable)  
Nortel  
White Paper  
Engineering a WLAN  
(not applicable)  
How to successfully  
deploy a WLAN  
Nortel  
White Paper  
[VoWLAN] Straight Talk  
on Converged Wireless  
LANs  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reference documents 221  
Title  
Revision  
Source and type  
Comments  
Nortel  
White Paper  
[QoE] Designing  
QoS-Enabled Networks  
for Voice & Data User  
Quality-of- Experience  
(QoE)  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
Nortel  
Technical Solution  
Guide  
IP Telephony Client  
Deployment  
January 2006  
Version 1.0  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
Nortel  
Technical Solution  
Guide  
Solutions Guide for  
VoWLAN  
January 2006  
Version 1.0  
Nortel  
Checklist  
QoS Checklist for  
VoWLAN using 2210 and  
2211 & 2212 Handsets  
Version 1.1  
Business  
Communications  
Review Article  
Designing VOIP  
Networks: Lessons  
From The Edge  
February 2003  
Nortel  
Configuration  
Guide  
CS1000 & C200 Secure  
VOIP for SOHO &  
Telecommuters  
1/31/2005  
Version 1.1  
Succession 1000 and  
Contivity 200 NAT  
traversal Solution  
v1.0  
Nortel  
Designing 802.11  
Design overview  
December 2004  
White Paper  
Wireless LAN Networks  
Nortel  
Technical Support  
Bulletin  
VoWLAN Implementatio  
n Best Practices  
TSB- 0502001  
02/01/2005  
(not applicable)  
SpectraLink  
White Paper  
SpectraLink Voice  
Priority  
5-03-edit  
Quality of Service for  
voice traffic on wireless  
LANs  
SpectraLink  
White Paper  
Deploying NetLink  
Wireless Phones  
Version 1.2.1  
November 2005  
Best practices  
SpectraLink  
White Paper  
NetLink Wireless  
Telephone WLAN  
Compatibility List  
PN: 72-9000-00-W  
See the current  
version at the  
SpectraLink Web  
site.  
NetLink Wireless  
Telephone WLAN  
Compatibility List  
IEEE  
[802.11] IEEE Std  
802.11  
Wireless LAN Medium  
Access Control  
and Physical Layer  
Specifications  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
IEEE  
Wireless LAN Medium  
(not applicable)  
Higher-Speed Physical  
Layer Extensions in the  
2.4 GHz Band  
[802.11b] IEEE Std Access Control  
802.11  
and Physical Layer  
Specifications  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222 Appendix B Troubleshooting WLAN IP Telephony installations  
Title  
Revision  
Source and type  
Comments  
IEEE  
Wireless LAN Medium  
(not applicable)  
Further Higher Data  
Rate Extension in the  
2.4 GHz Band  
[802.11g] IEEE Std Access Control  
802.11  
and Physical Layer  
Specifications  
SpectraLink  
White Paper  
Cisco 1100-1200- 1300  
AP config/deploy guide  
PN: 72-9962-00-A  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
SpectraLink  
Configuration Note  
Cisco Aironet  
PN: 72-9975-00-C  
beta  
350/1100/1200 (DS)  
AP – IOS Operating  
System  
SpectraLink  
Configuration Note  
CISCO AP Setup for  
external radius for FSR  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
72_9974_00_B.pdf  
(not applicable)  
(not applicable)  
SpectraLink  
Configuration Note  
CISCO external radius  
setup for FSR  
SpectraLink  
Configuration Note  
Airespace Wireless  
Enterprise Platform –  
AireOS  
Updated AUTORF  
settings  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
Appendix C  
Compatible Access Points  
The Nortel Voice over Wireless LAN solution is supported on VIEW-certified  
Access Points (APs).  
For a list of certified APs, go to the SpectraLink Web site  
www.spectralink.com. On the home page, select RESOURCES > Wi-Fi  
COMPATIBILITY.  
The SpectraLink Web site also contains configuration notes for the  
compatible APs.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
224  
Index  
options 184  
server options 184  
DiffServ 83, 83  
duplex mismatch 46, 122, 124  
Symbols/Numerics  
10 Mbs 73  
50 ms 80  
70 ms 80  
802.1 pq 83  
802.1p tagging 83, 83  
E
echo 124  
Error Status screen 119  
External Applications Server 83  
A
Access Points (APs)  
Compatible 223  
F
Administration Console navigation  
alarms 119  
alarms on the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 120  
filters 65  
Full-duplex 46  
G
alarms, active 120  
AP  
G.711 79  
configuration 193  
G.723.1 80  
G.729A 79  
G.729B 79  
Gain adjustment 81  
C
Call Server 111  
CFNA 124  
checking in 111  
Cisco 178  
H
4400 Series WLAN Controller 178  
Aironet 1200 series 178  
Aironet 1200 Series 194  
configuration examples 181  
Codecs 79, 80  
half-duplex 73  
I
ISM parameters 27  
Components 26  
CS 1000 90  
J
jitter 80  
jitter buffer 79, 80  
D
DHCP 74  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index 225  
remote endpoint 80  
reset the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
RF  
basics 193  
RLR 80  
Roaming 64  
Routers 65  
RTCP 80  
RTP 79  
L
Language 27  
latency 80  
Layer 2 port 83  
Layer 2 QoS 83  
Layer 2 switch port 83  
Layer 3 port 83  
locking the WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
2245 115  
loss plan 81  
LTPS 111  
S
Security  
M
Virtual Private Network (VPN) 28  
master WLAN IP Telephony Manager  
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 28  
Wi-Fi Protected Access2 (WPA2) 28  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 28  
Send Loudness Rating (SLR) 80  
site data-gathering  
multicast addresses 65  
Multicasting 65  
N
tables 173  
network segments 65  
No ring 124  
SLR 80  
software updates 114  
software versions 115  
subnet 65  
node 80  
non-master WLAN IP Telephony Server  
2245 60  
Nortel  
WLAN Security Switch 178  
Nortel WLAN Security Switch 2270 178  
SVPServer  
Mounting 96  
switches  
configuration 177  
P
T
packet loss 80  
TFTP 115  
Planning worksheets 75  
prevent new calls from starting 115  
priority 83  
Programmable rings and tones 81  
Push-to-talk (PTT) 28, 65  
Timing function 64  
tone capability 81  
troubleshooting 46, 111  
U
UNIStim 79, 83  
unzipped 39  
Q
Quality of Service  
checklist 191  
Update software 114  
V
R
Virtual Private Network (VPN) 28  
VLAN 65  
rack-mount unit 74  
Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) 80  
refresh 39  
voice mail 124  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226 Index  
WLAN  
configuration 183  
WLAN applications 191  
W
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 28  
Wi-Fi Protected Access2 (WPA2) 28  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 28  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
NN43001-504 01.02 Standard  
Release 5.0 15 June 2007  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Commissioning  
Copyright © 2004-2007, Nortel Networks  
All Rights Reserved.  
Publication: NN43001-504  
Document status: Standard  
Document version: 01.02  
Document date: 15 June 2007  
To provide feedback or report a problem in the document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.  
Sourced in Canada  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and  
recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied  
warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in  
this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.  
Nortel, the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Moxa Technologies Switch NPort 6110 User Manual
MTX Audio Car Amplifier TA4252 User Manual
Network Technologies Switch RACKMUX UW15 4USB RACKMUX UW15 8USB RACKMUX UW17 4USB RACKMUX UW17 8USB User Manual
NordicTrack Home Gym NTEVEL59011 User Manual
NordicTrack Network Router 3G10WV User Manual
Nortel Networks Switch 8010 User Manual
Omnitron Systems Technology Network Card 400FTD User Manual
Oregon Digital Camera DS8618 User Manual
Panasonic MP3 Player AJ PCS060G User Manual
Parkside Nail Gun PET 25 User Manual